JP2015006270A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide accurate put-out control even without a function for back-up of put-out control means.SOLUTION: Game control means (game control device 100) performs control of sending a winning ball command to put-out control means on the basis of a state signal (busy signal) output from the put-out control means (put-out control device 200) and indicating whether or not the put-out control means can start put-out control. In the case in which a power failure occurs and is then recovered, even when the state signal indicating that the put-out control can be started is output from the put-out control means, the winning ball command is not sent to the put-out control means soon, but the winning ball command is sent to the put-out control means in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the put-out control can be started is continuously output from the put-out control means for a predetermined period.

Description

  The present invention provides game control means for performing overall game control and transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball in a prize area provided in the game area, and a prize ball transmitted from the game control means The present invention relates to a gaming machine including payout control means for performing payout control of game balls based on a command.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a power cut-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control means backs up data in its own storage means and maintains the payout control state based on the data immediately before the power cut-off.

JP 2000-312759 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs.

  An object of the present invention is to realize accurate payout control without providing a payout control means with a function for backing up.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the invention described in claim 1 is a game that performs game control in an integrated manner and transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to a prize area provided in the game area. Control means;
Payout control means for performing payout control of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means includes
Based on a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, control to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means,
When a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control means even if the status signal indicating that payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Do not send,
The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means being continuously output over a predetermined period. It is characterized by that.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing a payout control means with a function for backing up. In other words, the game control means performs control for transmitting a prize ball command based on the status signal output from the payout control means, so that the prize ball command is transmitted only when the payout control means can immediately execute the payout control. Will be. As a result, data corresponding to winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held on the game control means side, so when a power outage occurs, it will be backed up by the game control means and will be backed up to the payout control means Accurate payout control can be realized even without a function.

Also, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control means. First, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output over a predetermined period. Since the player can surely recognize that the prize ball command can be received, the prize ball command is transmitted, so that the prize ball command can be prevented from being missed.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the payout control means is
Even when the prize ball command is received from the game control means during a period when the game control means is outputting a status signal indicating that the payout control means cannot start payout control. The payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, even if the prize ball command is transmitted by mistake for some reason, the corresponding payout control is performed without losing the prize ball command, which is disadvantageous to the player. Never become.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a plurality of winning areas having different numbers of prize balls are provided in the gaming area,
The game control means includes
For each prize ball number, a prize ball command counter that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted,
The status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means,
The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. It is characterized by that.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, the status signal is used to determine whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent useless processing for checking each prize ball command counter when the prize ball command cannot be transmitted, and to reduce the control burden.

  According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing a function for backing up the payout control apparatus.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a payout apparatus control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning ball control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a ball lending control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a request monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining command analysis processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the state of a payout busy signal, and payout operation | movement. It is a figure explaining reception of the payout command in case a payout busy signal is ON. It is the figure which looked at the game machine in 2nd Embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the circulation apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a system block diagram of the game store in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the game machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the power supply delay circuit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the package display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the payout control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the payout control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the payout control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in the payout control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the information communicated with the process at the time of power activation in 2nd Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that has a lamp or the like built therein and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, on the lower part of the front frame 12 is an upper plate 21 (not shown) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (
A storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 from which a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flows out, and a game ball paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full. A lower tray (receiving tray) 23 to be stored, an operation unit 24 of a hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. The effect button 25 forms an operation means with a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating is provided at an upper part and a right part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be converted to a state in which a game ball can easily flow into the upper portion by opening it in the shape of a reverse “C” at the top, and a second start winning opening ( An ordinary variable winning device (Fuden) 37 having a starting winning area is provided.

  The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that a game ball can be won even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball may be harder to win than the open state.

  Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device (first big prize opening, lower large size) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. (Winning opening) 38 is arranged.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the inside of the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

Also, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device (second big prize opening, upper big prize winning) that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39) is provided. The second special variation prize winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members 39c, 39c, and the pair of movable members 39c, 39c is normally closed with a gap of about the diameter of the game ball (disadvantageous for the player). Hold). However, an armor portion 40a that restricts the inflow of the game ball to the inside of the center case 40 extends above the second special variable prize-winning device 39 so that the game ball cannot win in the closed state. Yes. When the result of the special figure change display game is a predetermined stop display mode and a special game state is entered, a reverse “C” character is formed by the special prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. The game ball is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) where the game ball can easily flow into the game ball, allowing the game ball to flow in, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Yes. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area). In the special game state, one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is released, and which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. Is done.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) 57 that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and lights up when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state. A second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator) 58, and a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. A status display (probability status display section) 59 and a round display section 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. Further, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holdings is “2”, only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holdings is “3”, only the lamp 3 is turned on. When the number of hold is “4”, all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

  The special figure 1 holding display 54 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. Here, the number of starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 in the same lighting manner as the ordinary figure hold indicator 56.

  For example, the first gaming state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the short time state occurs.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example. If the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are won, or they flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 3), the sheet is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure change display game is the normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is (Priority) to be executed.

In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. When the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half variation pattern as a pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special results is different (expected values are different) as reach effects: normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach) Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of place). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36 a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to and supplied from a gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a, a lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and an upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. There are provided interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a fraud signal fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy. A signal is also input. The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. Signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes signals and payouts from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 Is input and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 to transmit data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid for opening the second special variable winning device 39). 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening 39b and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138 a and a second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off driving signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control device 200 includes a CPU unit 210 having a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 made up of an amusement chip (IC), an input unit 220 having an input port, an output port, a driver, and the like in the same manner as the game microcomputer 111. An output unit 230, a CPU unit 210, a data bus 240 that connects the input unit 220 and the output unit 230, and the like.

  The CPU unit 210 includes a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) that generates a clock that serves as a reference for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. ) 213 and the like.

  The payout microcomputer 211 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 211A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 211B, and a RAM (random access memory) 211C that can be read and written as needed. Also, the payout microcomputer 211 generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 211A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213. It has a clock generator.

  The CPU 211A executes a control program in the ROM 211B, and a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 or a loan request signal from the card unit 600. , Rental balls) are discharged from the dispensing device.

  The ROM 211B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area for the CPU 211A and a storage area for various signals during game control. As the ROM 211B or the RAM 211C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The input unit 220 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 221. The proximity I / F 221 is connected to a frame radio wave sensor 80 provided on the front frame 12 for detecting the emission of radio waves, and a payout ball detection switch 81 for detecting a game ball to be paid out. A negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch is converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Thus, the proximity I / F 221 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 221 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The proximity I / F 221 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal 1.

  The output of the proximity I / F 221 is supplied to the input port 223 and read into the payout microcomputer 211 via the data bus 240. Also, the input port 223 has a shoot ball break switch 82 that detects a shortage of game balls before paying out, and an overflow that detects that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full). A detection signal of the switch 83 and a communication signal from the card unit 600 connected via the photocoupler 226 are also input. In addition, an operation signal is input to the input port 223 from an error release switch 227 that is provided in the payout control device 200 and is used to release an error caused by radio wave detection or the like. The detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 81 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 221 is also supplied to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 90.

The data held by the input port 223 is stored in the input port 223 by the payout microcomputer 211.
It is possible to read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing it to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to.

  Further, the payout control device 200 relays a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 output from the launch control device 700 and outputs the relayed signal to the game control device 100. Also, the payout control device 200 relays the launch permission signal output from the game control device 100 and outputs it to the launch control device 700.

  In addition, the payout control device 200 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 225 for inputting a reset signal from the power supply device 400 and a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 to the payout microcomputer 211 and the like. The Schmitt buffer 225 has a function of removing noise from these input signals.

  The reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 225 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the payout microcomputer 211 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 230. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to the input port 223 of the input unit 220. Data set in each port of the output unit 230 by the payout microcomputer 211 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent a malfunction of the system, but the data is discharged from the input port 223 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the microcomputer 211 is discarded when the payout microcomputer 211 is reset.

  The payout control device 200 is supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, the payout control device 200, the payout motor 91 driven by the payout control device 200, and the like. The electronic parts can be operated. Further, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, and DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 400 is also supplied to the launch control device 700 via the payout control device 200.

  The output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and includes a first output port 231 for outputting the launch permission signal 2 as a data signal to the launch control device 700. The launch control device 700 is supplied with a launch permission signal generated by the game control device 100 and a launch permission signal 2 generated by the payout control device 200, at least one of which is a firing prohibition signal. When it is outputting, it is set to a prohibited state, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. The first output port 231 also outputs a data signal that is provided in the payout control device 200 and that controls an error state display device 250 that displays an error that has occurred in the payout control device 200 according to the lighting state of the LED.

  The output unit 230 includes a second output port 232 that is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs a data signal to the game control device 100. From the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 via this second output port, a frame radio wave illegal signal indicating that the frame radio wave sensor 80 provided on the front frame 12 has detected a radio wave, the payout control device 200. A payout busy signal indicating whether or not payout control can be started, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are output.

  The output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240, and a third output port 233 for outputting an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 of the payout device, a data signal to the external device, and a data signal to the card unit 600. Is provided.

Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a first driver (drive circuit) 236 that receives an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 output from the third output port 233 and generates and outputs a motor drive signal. In addition, a second information signal is output from the third output port 233 to an external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device, and a second data signal is output from the third output port 233 to the card unit 600. A driver 237 is provided. These drivers are supplied with the necessary power supply voltage.

  The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a photocoupler 238 for transmitting a data signal to the card unit 600.

  Further, the output unit 230 is configured to be capable of being mounted with a fourth output port 234 that is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs various signals to a test fire test apparatus of an accredited engine (not shown) via the relay board 70. The fourth output port 234 is a component that is not mounted on the payout control device 200 of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game shop.

  Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a photocoupler 239 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 239 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the payout microcomputer 211 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the payout microcomputer 211 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus a port such as the input port 223 is not provided.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and an FRAM (registered trademark) 323 storing various data. Has been. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors Process such as drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect motor control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect motor control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates the moving light 16) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 detects the state of the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15 and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 to perform main control. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided. Note that the switch input circuit 336 also has a function of detecting the on / off state of the effect agent switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. good.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V for powering the command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving the LED and the speaker is generated. Yes. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a VDP 312, a tone generator LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control a lamp and a motor, and an amplifier circuit 337 that drives a speaker. To reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this general-purpose fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b or the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize opening solenoid 39b. The members 39c and 39c are opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in which the opening time (general power opening time) is the normal state. It is possible to perform control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 6, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) is first performed to set a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. In step S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) is performed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Next, a firing prohibition signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S4). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S5), an interrupt mode setting process (step S6) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed, and a process for setting the power supply delay timer is performed (step S6). S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc., by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S17). S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums coincide with each other (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Thereafter, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S22). If the probability is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high-probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is turned on, for example. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the below-mentioned special figure game process rationally is transmitted to an effect control board (step S25), and it progresses to step S31.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to zero. (Step S27), the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (Step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (step S30), and it progresses to step S31.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S25 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in step S30 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a decoration indicating the number of suspensions in FIGS. A special figure 1 hold number command, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is the replacement method when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times of checking and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S3
8; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 8 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S101) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input processing (step S102) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in step S4 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S104), a random number update process 1 (step S105), and a random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, the upper count switch 39a, A prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 A magnet / radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S111) is performed in which a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality or a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, external information editing processing (step S112) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, after performing the process of restoring the saved register data in step S101 (step S113), the process for permitting the interrupt (step S114) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas is classified by the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 13 winning balls, 14 winning balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the number of counts in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers in all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S190. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of prize balls corresponding to the area is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of winning balls and the acquired number of winning balls are added and saved as a new remaining number of winning balls in the remaining winning ball area (step S186). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the remaining prize ball number area is 10 or more, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step S187). If not 10 or more (step S187; N), the process proceeds to step S190. Transition. If it is 10 or more (step S187; Y), a predetermined number 10 serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S188), and the main prize ball signal is obtained. The value of the output count area is updated by +1 (step S189), and the process returns to step S187. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step S190, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S190), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step S191). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step S191; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step S191; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status is in an idle state (step S192).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status is information in which whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal is set in an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, payout Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  If the payout busy signal status is not in the idle state (step S192; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When not in an idle state, a busy state and an indefinite state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal status is in the idle state (step S192; Y), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S193), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S193: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S194), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting number of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step S195). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S195; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S195; N), the process returns to step S193 and the above processing is repeated.

  When it is determined in step S193 that there is a count number (step S193; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S196), and the target winning number counter is counted. A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (step S197). Then, the payout command is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S198), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (step S199), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to one lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S301), and a large winning is achieved. In spite of the fact that the mouth is not open, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning mouth and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the number of illegal winnings Information of an upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), a winning mouth monitoring table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening monitoring table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to the respective switches to be monitored.

Thereafter, the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower grand prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is achieved. An illegal & winning prize monitoring process (step S304) is executed. Then, a fraud monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

  Next, a fraud monitoring table is prepared for a winning switch (a start port 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric train (step S307), monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S308) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S309), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S310) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose state should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S314). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S315) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step S316). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step S317; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step S317; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S317), and a gaming machine state check is performed to determine whether an error has occurred. Processing (step S318) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S319) for setting a busy signal status based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step S317 to S319 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step S317 to S319 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 11 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the machine. For the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize-winning device 37), it is easy to cheat by opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection of fraud, fraud monitoring.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the lower count switch 38a. In the case of the upper count switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step S325).

  The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the player from judging that the signal is fraudulent when the prize is received or when noise is added to the signal, and is not simply judged as an error although it is not illegal.

  If the determined number has not been exceeded (step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 326) S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the one lower count switch 38a, and is not allowed when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 39a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 12 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

If there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S354). Step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S35)
5; Y) loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and it is determined whether all switches have been monitored (step S361). . If an overflow has occurred (step S359; Y), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S361).

  If all the switches have not been monitored (step S361; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S361; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 13 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S371). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control (see FIG. 21).

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S371; Y), a busy state flag is set as the determination status (step S372), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S371; N), the idle state flag is set as the determination status (step S373), and the previous busy signal data is loaded (step S374).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current signal is different from the previous signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change in on or off (step S375). If not (step S375; N), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1. (Step S378). If they are different (step S375; Y), the current signal state is saved as the previous busy signal data (step S376), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S377), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step S378).

  Next, it is determined whether the time counted by the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) (step S379). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step S379; N), the payout busy signal is determined. End the check process. If the signal confirmation time has been reached (step S379; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept before the confirmation time (step S380), and whether the value of the busy signal status area matches the determination status? Is determined (step S381).

  If it matches the determination status (step S381; Y), the payout busy signal check process ends. If the determination status does not match (step S381; N), the determination status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S382), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  Next, the control executed by the payout microcomputer 211 of the payout control device 200 will be described. In the payout microcomputer 211, the main processing shown in FIG. 14 is performed.

[Main processing]
The main process starts when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step A1) is performed, then an interrupt vector setting process (step A2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt process mode. An interrupt mode setting process (step A3) is set.

  Next, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step A4), and all output ports are set to off (no output) (step A5). After that, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer setting process (step A6) is performed to set a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved, and a serial port for communication with the game control device 100 is set. (Step A7).

  Then, all work areas before the access-prohibited area are cleared (step A8), all stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared (step A9), and initial values are saved in the area to be initialized (step A10). ). Next, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal in the payout microcomputer 211 (clock generator) is activated (step A11). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the payout microcomputer 211. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 211A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating.

  Thereafter, an interruption is permitted (step A12), and a firing control determination process for determining whether or not the game ball can be launched is performed (step A13). In this firing control determination process, it is determined whether or not the card unit 600 is correctly connected. If the card unit 600 is correctly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set to ON (permitted state). Set to OFF (prohibited state).

  Thereafter, it is determined based on a ball lending request from the card unit 600 whether or not the ball lending control mode for discharging the game ball is in progress (step A14). The ball lending control mode is a state in which the ball lending control flag is set, and whether or not the ball lending control mode is in is determined by the presence or absence of the ball lending control flag.

  In this ball lending mode (step A14; Y), a ball lending control process (step A15) for performing overall control related to ball lending is performed, a payout control process (step A18) is performed, and an error notification edit process (step A14). A21) is performed. By this ball lending control processing (step A15) and payout control processing (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on a ball lending request transmitted from the card unit 600 when the player performs a lending operation. The

  On the other hand, when it is not in the ball lending control mode (step A14; N), the winning ball control for discharging the gaming ball based on the payout command (prizing ball command) transmitted from the gaming control device 100 when the winning at the winning opening is generated. It is determined whether the mode is being executed (step A16). The prize ball control mode is a state in which the prize ball control in-progress flag is set, and whether the prize ball control mode is in effect is determined by the presence or absence of the prize ball in-control flag.

  If the prize ball control mode is in effect (step A16; Y), a prize ball control process (step A17) for performing overall control relating to the prize ball is performed, a payout control process (step A18) is performed, and an error notification editing process is performed. (Step A21) is performed. By the prize ball control process (step A17) and the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the payout command transmitted from the game control device 100 when a winning is made at the winning opening.

  In the payout control process (step A18), sequence control necessary to perform a common game ball payout operation in payout of winning balls or payout of lending balls is performed. In addition, when the payout of the winning ball or the rented ball is completed in this payout control process, the ball lending control flag and the winning ball control in progress flag are cleared, and the ball lending control mode and the winning ball control mode are ended. Yes.

  If the prize ball control mode is not in effect (step A16; N), an excessive payout error monitoring process (step A19) is performed to monitor the occurrence and release of an error in which game balls are excessively paid out. The cancellation of the excessive payout error is performed based on an operation of an error release switch 227 provided in the payout control device 200.

  Then, a payout device control start determination process (step A20) for setting the start of the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode is performed, and an error notification editing process (step A21) is performed. In the error notification editing process (step A21), the status of various errors is determined, the display data of the error status display device 250 provided in the payout control device 200 is edited, the information transmitted to the game control device 100 is edited, and the test shooting Performs processing such as editing test signal output data. Thereafter, a condition relating to the output of the payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control can be started is determined, and a payout busy signal editing process (step A22) for editing output data of the payout busy signal is performed. Return to Step A13.

[Dispensing device control start determination process]
FIG. 15 shows the payout device control start determination process (step A20) in the main process shown in FIG. In this payout device control start determination process, first, it is determined whether or not an excessive payout error has occurred (step A31), and if an excessive payout error has occurred (step A31; Y), the payout device control start determination process ends. . If the payout excess error is not in progress (step A31; N), a prize ball control start determination process (step A32) is performed, a ball lending control start determination process (step A33) is performed, and a payout apparatus control start determination process is performed. finish.

[Prize ball control start determination process]
FIG. 16 shows the prize ball control start determination process (step A32) in the payout device control start determination process shown in FIG. In this prize ball control start determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of acquired game balls is 0 (step A41). The remaining number of game balls to be acquired is the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out among the prize balls set to be paid out based on the payout command.

  When the remaining number of game balls acquired is 0 (step A41; Y), the award ball control start determination process ends. If the remaining number of game balls acquired is not 0 (step A41; N), it is determined whether or not the award ball can be paid out (step A42). Here, the state in which the payout of the prize ball can be started means that a frame radio wave error set based on detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor 80, a lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is short-circuited illegally, This is a state in which no error is occurring, such as a switch abnormality error that is set based on detection of an abnormal state in which the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector or the lead wire is disconnected and becomes floating.

  If it is not possible to start paying out the prize ball (step A42; N), the prize ball control start determination process is terminated. If the payout of the winning ball can be started (step A42; Y), the winning ball control in-progress flag is set (step A43), and the winning ball control start determination process is terminated. Thereby, the payout control of the prize ball is started.

[Ball loan control start determination process]
FIG. 17 shows a ball lending control start determination process (step A33) in the payout device control start determination process shown in FIG. In this ball lending control start determination process, it is first determined whether or not a ball lending request has been detected (step A51). The ball lending request is a request for paying out a ball that is input from the card unit 600 based on a player's operation, and a request signal from the card unit 600 in a request monitoring process (step A65) in a timer interrupt process described later. It is detected by monitoring.

  When the ball lending request has not been detected (step A51; N), the ball lending control start determination process ends. If a ball lending request has been detected (step A51; Y), a ball lending control in-progress flag is set (step A52), and the ball lending control start determination process ends. Since the ball lending control start determination process is performed after the prize ball control start determination process, the ball lending control in-progress flag is overwritten and set by the award ball control in-progress flag. In other words, when both the payout of the winning ball and the payout of the rental ball can be executed, the payout of the rental ball is given priority.

  That is, the card unit 600 serves as a ball lending signal control means for outputting a ball lending command (ball lending request) related to the lending of the ball based on the player's operation. Also, the payout control device 200 receives a prize ball command (payout command) transmitted from the game control means (game control device 100) and a ball lending command (ball lending request) transmitted from the ball lending signal control means (card unit 600). ), Payout control means for performing payout control of game balls.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the payout control device 200 will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 211A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the payout microcomputer 211, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step A61) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the payout microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step A62) for performing drive control of the payout motor 91 and the like is performed, and inputs from various sensors and switches, and signal acquisition, An input process (step A63) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

  Next, timer update processing (step A64) for updating various timers is performed, and it is possible to check out commands from the game control device 100, ball rental requests from the card unit 600, etc., and pay out winning balls or balls. A request monitoring process (step A65) for performing the setting is performed. Thereafter, an input monitoring process (step A66) for monitoring the input switch system signals such as the signals from the payout ball detection switch 81, the chute ball cut switch 82, the overflow switch 83 and the frame radio wave sensor 80 and the abnormality detection signal 1. I do.

  Then, a payout unit editing process (step A67) for editing the control signal of the payout motor 91 is performed, and a payout prize ball signal transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number. External information editing processing (step A68) for editing is performed. Subsequently, the interrupt request is cleared (step A69), the process of restoring the register data saved in step A61 (step A70) is performed, and then the process of permitting the interrupt (step A71) is performed to perform the timer interrupt process. Exit.

[Request monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the request monitoring process (step A65) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this request monitoring process, first, a command analysis process (step A81) for analyzing a payout command from the game control device 100 and setting the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed. Then, a ball lending request monitoring process (step A82) for setting the number of balls to be paid out based on a request signal from the card unit 600 is performed, and the request monitoring process is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 20 shows a command analysis process (step A81) in the request monitoring process shown in FIG. In this command analysis process, first, it is determined whether there is command reception data (step A91). If there is no command reception data (step A91; N), the command analysis process ends. If there is command reception data (step A91; Y), it is determined whether a reception error has occurred (step A92).

  If a reception error has occurred (step A92; Y), the serial reception circuit is initialized (step A93), and the command analysis process ends. If no reception error has occurred (step A92; N), the payout command is read from the serial reception buffer (step A94), and it is determined whether the command is abnormal (step A95). If the command is abnormal (step A95; Y), the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command is not abnormal (step A95; N), the remaining number of winning game balls indicating the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out is loaded (step A96), and the number of prize balls indicated by the command in the loaded value. Are added (step A97).

  Next, it is determined whether the value after the addition is 255 or less, which is the upper limit value that can be counted in the remaining area for the number of game balls acquired (step A98). If the value after the addition is 255 or less (step A98; Y), the value after the addition is saved in the remaining number of acquired game balls (step A100), and the command analysis process is terminated. If the value after addition is not 255 or less (step A98; N), 255 is set as the value after addition (step A99), and the value after addition is saved in the remaining number of game balls to be acquired (step S99). A100), the command analysis process is terminated. Since the remaining number of acquired game balls is storable up to 255, the value after the addition does not exceed 255 and the value does not go round even for a moment and becomes a small value such as 0. After the calculation, the data is written to the RAM.

[Payout busy signal editing process]
FIG. 21 shows the payout busy signal editing process (step A22) in the main process shown in FIG. In this payout busy signal editing process, the on data of the payout busy signal is set when the prize ball payout control cannot be started (step A118), and the payout busy signal is turned off when the prize ball payout control can be started. Data is set (step A117).

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 does not transmit a payout command when the payout busy signal is on. Since the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function at the time of a power failure, if a payout command is sent one after another while paying out a prize ball or a rental ball or in a situation where the payout is impossible, a prize will be given when a power failure occurs. The memory of the number of balls disappears and accurate payout becomes impossible. Therefore, the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout command can be received so that the payout command can be received only when the payout control can be started immediately.

  When the winning ball payout control cannot be started, when the remaining number of game balls acquired is not 0 (step A111; Y), when the ball lending request has been detected (step A112; Y), the payout prohibition state is set. In the case (step A113; Y), when not in the ball lending control mode and the winning ball control mode, the standby operation is not in progress (step A114; N), or when the shot ball runout switch is in an unconfirmed state (step A115; Y) is a case where the overflow switch is in an indeterminate state (step A116; Y).

  The case where the ball lending request has been detected (step A112; Y) is a state from when the ball lending request is detected until the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request is started. When the ball lending operation is started, the standby operation is not performed (step A114; N). Therefore, the payout busy signal continues until the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request is ended after the ball lending request is detected. Turns on. In addition, the payout prohibition status includes errors such as shooting ball out of error (out of ball), overflow error (overflow), frame radio wave error, switch error error, insufficient payout error, excessive payout error, etc. Set when it occurs.

  Further, the unconfirmed state of the switch is a state where the detection state of the switch is not confirmed. The detection state of the switch is determined when a state in which the switch detects an error state or a normal state (on or off) continues for a specified time. Since the switch detection state is reset when the power is turned on, the switch detection state is in an unconfirmed state until the switch continues to be in an error state or a normal state for a specified time. When the error detection state continues for a specified time and the switch detection state is confirmed as an error state, the error state is canceled when the error state is not detected for a predetermined time. It is supposed to be.

  FIG. 22 shows a manner of paying out a winning ball or a ball rental and outputting a payout busy signal. Game control that the payout busy signal is turned off (output stop state) and the payout command can be accepted in a state where payout control can be started immediately without payout of winning balls or rental balls. Shown in apparatus 100. Then, when a payout command is received from the game control device 100 (t1), a payout operation of the corresponding number (here, 3) prize balls is started.

  During the execution of the award ball payout operation (from t1 to t2), the payout busy signal is turned on (output state), which indicates to the game control device 100 that the payout command cannot be accepted. When the payout operation is completed (t2), the payout busy signal is turned off, indicating that the game control device 100 can accept the payout command.

Also, when a ball lending request for requesting the lending of a ball from the card unit 600 is received (t3), a corresponding number of lending of a ball is started. During the execution of this lending operation (
From t3 to t4), the payout busy signal is turned on to indicate to the game control device 100 that the payout command cannot be accepted. When the payout operation is completed (t4), the payout busy signal is turned off, indicating that the game control device 100 can accept the payout command.

  Thus, by setting the payout busy signal to the on state during the payout control, the game control device 100 is put on hold to send out payout commands, and a large number of unpaid prize balls are accumulated in the payout control device 200. Therefore, the payout control device 200 does not have to have a backup function when a power failure occurs.

  When the game ball payout operation is completed and the payout busy signal is turned off (t4), and a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 sets the idle state as the busy signal status, and the transmission is suspended. The payout command that has been sent is transmitted (t5), and the payout operation is started.

  The card unit 600 transmits a request signal regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. Here, the card unit 600 requests the payout of the lending ball from the card unit 600 during the period during which the award ball is being paid out. A ball lending request is received (t6). In this case, the ball lending operation is started after completion of the award ball payout operation (t7). At this time, the payout busy signal is maintained in the on state without turning the payout busy signal in the off state upon completion of the prize ball payout operation.

  In this case, once the payout busy signal is turned off between the award ball payout operation and the lending payout operation, the game control device 100 may transmit a payout command depending on the length of time in the off state. There is. Since the payout control device 200 gives priority to paying out the rental balls, the payout of the prize balls based on the payout command is performed after waiting for the payout of the rental balls. As a result, unpaid winning ball data is held in the payout control device 200, and the winning ball data may be lost due to the occurrence of a power failure. Therefore, the payout busy signal is maintained in the ON state so that the payout command is not transmitted.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout command from being transmitted during the execution of the payout control based on the ball lending request, and the payout control device 200 does not hold the data of unpaid award balls on hold. There is no possibility of loss of prize ball data due to the occurrence, and accurate payout control can be realized without providing a function for backing up the payout control apparatus 200.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rental ball is prioritized over the payout of the winning ball by separate control, but even if there is no such control, the payout busy signal is kept on and no payout command is transmitted. By doing so, the payout control based on the ball lending request has priority over the payout control based on the payout command, and the ball lending discharge operation can be executed promptly when there is a ball lending operation. Further, since the card unit 600 transmits a ball lending request regardless of whether or not the payout control is being performed, the payout control based on the ball lending request is performed in preference to the payout control based on a payout command that can be suspended. Thus, it is possible to shorten the period in which the payout control device 200 holds the ball rental request on hold, reduce the possibility of loss of the ball loan request due to the occurrence of a power failure, and provide a function for backing up the payout control device 200. Even if it is not, accurate payout control can be realized.

From the above, game control means (game control device 100) for performing game control in an integrated manner and transmitting a prize ball command related to payout of a prize ball based on a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means and a ball lending command transmitted from the ball lending signal control means (card unit 600); And the game control means is in an output stop state indicating that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means, and the payout control means indicates that when the payout control is performed based on the prize ball command, the payout control means cannot start the payout control. Condition A signal is output to the game control means, and when the payout control is performed based on the ball lending command, a status signal indicating that the payout control means cannot start the payout control is output to the game control means. If the ball lending command is received during the payout control based on the prize ball command, the state started with the payout control based on the prize ball command even if the payout control based on the prize ball command ends. The payout control based on the ball lending command is performed without stopping the output of the signal.

  FIG. 23 shows a case where a payout command is received during the payout operation. Since the payout busy signal is turned on during the payout operation, the payout command is not normally received during the payout operation, but the payout busy signal is input to the game control device 100 for some reason such as disconnection. If the game control device 100 recognizes that the payout busy signal is off, the payout command may be transmitted. Even in such a case, the payout control apparatus 200 performs payout control based on the received payout command.

  When a payout command is transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the fact that the payout busy signal is in the off state, the award ball payout operation is started (t11), and the payout busy signal is turned on. Here, a payout command for 15 award balls is transmitted, and 15 is added as the remaining number of acquired game balls. Each time one award ball is paid out, the remaining number of acquired game balls is subtracted. For example, by paying out the first prize ball, the remaining number of acquired game balls is set to 14 (t12). .

  When the fourth prize ball is paid out and the remaining number of game balls is 11, the payout command for 15 prize balls from the game control device 100 even though the payout busy signal is on. Is receiving. Although the receiving of the payout command cannot occur normally, the payout control apparatus 200 adds the new prize ball number 15 to the remaining number of game balls to be paid out based on the payout command.

  Thereafter, the payout operation is terminated based on the payout of 30 prize balls based on the payout command for 15 15 prize balls twice, and the payout busy signal is turned off (t14). After this, the usual payout control can be performed, and when a new payout command is received, the payout operation of the prize ball is started (t15), and the payout busy signal is turned on.

  In this way, even if a payout command is received during a period when the payout command is not normally received, the corresponding prize ball is paid out without discarding the payout command. Even when the payout command is transmitted, the payout command can be surely paid out without losing the payout command, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  From the above, the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) outputs a state signal indicating that the payout control means cannot start payout control to the game control means (game control apparatus 100). Even when a prize ball command (payout command) is received from the game control means, the payout control corresponding to the received prize ball command is performed.

Even if the game control device 100 transmits a payout command, the game control device 100 stores the payout command, and erases the stored payout command when the payout busy signal is turned off. If a power failure occurs before the signal is turned off, the payout command stored after the power failure is restored may be retransmitted. In this way, the payout command is deleted after the game control device 100 confirms that the payout based on the sent out payout command is completed, and the payout command is backed up even if a power failure occurs during the payout. Therefore, the payout can be performed again after the power failure is restored, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. The confirmation of the completion of the payout does not have to be based on the payout busy signal being turned off. For example, the payout control device 200 may transmit information indicating that the payout has been completed.

  Further, the payout control device 200 may be configured to back up the number of game balls that have not been paid out. Since the gaming machine of this embodiment does not generate so many unpaid game balls, such a configuration requires only a minimum backup function. In addition, the payout control device 200 transmits the number of unpaid game balls to the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and the game control device 100 backs up the number of game balls that have not been paid out. The number of unpaid game balls that have been backed up may be transmitted. Also, a payout busy signal is output to the card unit 600, and the card unit 600 outputs a ball lending request when the payout busy signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Also good.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part which has the structure similar to the game machine of the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment. The gaming machine of the present embodiment also has a backup function of the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200.
Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment also has a backup function of the RAM 211C, there is no problem even if it does not have a function of notifying the reception of a command by a payout busy signal like the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above. However, the provision of this function produces an effect that the amount of data to be backed up by the payout control device 200 can be minimized.

A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 (enclosed ball game machine) of this example.

  This pachinko machine 10 is a so-called encapsulated ball game machine and includes a game control device (see FIG. 29) for managing and controlling the progress of the game, and a predetermined number (for example, 20) in the game machine body. ) Of game balls, and based on the number of possessed balls (game value) based on valuable value information (ball loan number) input from a card unit (CR unit) 600 as a game medium lending device, The enclosed game ball is launched into the game area 32 to play a game, and it is determined whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state. The enclosed game ball is increased by increasing the number of possessed balls (game value) that is a player's profit in accordance with the number of prize balls and collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area 32 and guiding them to the launch position. A machine that uses pachinko to circulate and play pachinko It has become. Here, the card unit 600 corresponds to a medium control unit that reads and writes information recorded in a game storage medium (game card or the like).

The pachinko machine 10 is fixed to the island on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 11 at a hinge portion 13 so as to be pivoted on the machine frame 11. And a front frame 12 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 30 (shown in FIG. 25) is attached to the front frame 12.
A glass frame 15 is attached to the front frame 12 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 32 (to be described later) of the game board 30 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 15. The glass frame 15 is pivotally supported by the front frame 12 at the hinge portion 13 so as to be opened and closed. That is, the glass frame 15 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 30 from a normal use state (closed state) in which the front surface of the game board 30 (a front surface including a game area 32 described later) is covered with a slight gap. It is possible to operate in a state (open state). In the open state of the glass frame 15, for example, an operator inserts a hand into the front surface of the game board 30 to release the clogged balls in the game area 32, or to insert a missing game ball. Is possible.
Here, the front frame 12 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 15 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are described.

A lower panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 15, and an operation display device 7, a ball count display device 3, and a decorative ball display device 270 are arranged on the lower panel 6. The decorative ball display device 270 includes an upper decorative ball display device 270a and a lower decorative ball display device 270b. The upper decorative ball display device 270a is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate, is arranged on the upper side of the operation display device 7, and includes a large number of LEDs. In the upper decorative ball display device 270a, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all the LEDs are turned on or moved and blinked, and when the number of held balls is 50 or less, half of all the LEDs are turned off. Control of the decoration is performed.
On the other hand, the lower decorative ball display device 270b is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is disposed on the lower side of the operation display device 7 (lower than the ball holding number display 3). It consists of LEDs. In the lower decorative ball display device 270b, for example, when the number of balls to be counted is 0, all LEDs are turned off, and during counting of the number of balls, the lower decorative ball display device is an image of a ball box from the upper decorative ball display device 270a. Decoration control is performed so that the LED (this part corresponds to the counting decoration unit 270c) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward 270b. Then, in accordance with the number of counted balls, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 270b in the image of the ball box, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. Done. A portion where the LED of the lower decorative ball display device 270b moves and blinks during counting of the number of balls is referred to as a counting decoration unit 270c.
The number-of-balls display 3 displays the number of balls that the player has acquired (that is, the game value as the player's profit). The number of balls) can be displayed.
Here, the number-of-balls display 3 constitutes a first game value display means for displaying the game value of the player under the management of the game machine (specifically, the payout control device 200). The number-of-balls display 3 constitutes a first display device that can display the number of balls.

Further, the lower panel 6 is provided with a counting switch 811, a break switch 812, a counting ball display 813, a counting ball use switch 814, and a presentation operation switch 25.
The counting switch 811, the break switch 812, and the counting ball use switch 814 are turned on (or alternately turned on and off) when the player presses an operation unit (button) on the surface of these switches. The counting ball display 813 is composed of a small LED, and if there is a counting ball, the LED is turned on. Specifically, the counting ball display 813 corresponds to the second display device, and is configured to be able to display at least the presence or absence of the counting ball by turning on / off the LED, which corresponds to simple display of the counting ball.
The count switch 811 is operated when the player desires to count the number of balls, and when the count switch 811 is pressed, the count of the number of balls is started. A count switch LED is provided inside the count switch 811, and the count switch LED is lit when urging to press the count switch 811. As described above, the counting switch 811 has a configuration in which the counting switch LED is incorporated.
The break switch 812 is operated when the player desires to take a break. When the break switch 812 is pressed, the gaming machine shifts to the break mode. A break switch effective LED is provided inside the break switch 812, and the break switch effective LED lights up when a break is possible. As described above, the break switch 812 is configured to incorporate the break switch effective LED.

The counting ball use switch 814 is operated when the player desires to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use switch 814 is operated once, the counting ball use number is determined from the counting ball number. The movement of the ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) is started. In other words, the counting ball use switch 814 corresponds to the concept of a switch used to start an operation of transferring a ball from a ball box to an upper plate. A counting ball use switch LED is provided inside the counting ball use switch 814, and the counting ball use switch LED is turned on when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. As described above, the counting ball use switch 814 is configured to include the counting ball use switch LED.
The production operation switch 25 can be involved in the production within a certain range and is operated by the player. The production operation switch 25 has a push button type switch (indicated as button P in FIG. 24) in the center, and corresponds to a so-called cross key. It has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. The push button type switch (button P) at the center can be involved in the production within a certain range when pressed by the player, and appears on the screen of the display device 41 by pressing the four switches arranged vertically and horizontally, for example. You can select numbers and symbols.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the aforementioned card unit 600 (card type medium control unit). When the card unit 600 inserts a game card (storage medium: game value storage medium) into the card slot 601 and the player operates the ball lending button 803 (see FIG. 30) of the operation display device 7, A predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

In addition, the card unit 600 is provided with a cash slot 602. The cash input slot 602 can input cash, and by inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, 10,000 yen), it can be within the range of the ball lending degree corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. A game ball is rented (ie, lending a ball; increasing the number of balls held).
As game cards that can be used in the card unit 600, in addition to prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by non-member general players, it is also possible to use a unique membership card called a house card. Yes, in that case, a membership card as a game card is inserted into the card slot 601. When this member card is inserted, the storage may be used on condition that the password of the member is input on the screen of the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7. Note that an LCD touch panel type screen is adopted as the screen of the operation display device 7, and the player can touch the touch panel with a finger and input a personal identification number.
Further, a card unit error notification LED 603 is arranged in the card unit 600, and the card unit error notification LED 603 notifies an error that has occurred in the card unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 25, the game board 30 is obtained by planting game nails on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 32 is formed. The game area 32 is an area in which a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and is judged to be out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won), and when the game ball enters the winning opening and is effectively safe Is configured such that data of a predetermined number of game balls set in accordance with the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball.
Returning to FIG. 24, a key insertion portion 26 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 24) of the front frame 12. .

Further, the operation display device 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 15 is for displaying the number of ball lending and the like and performing operations such as ball lending (see FIG. 30 for details). Next to the operation display device 7, as described above, the presentation operation switch 25 (first production operation unit) is a push button type operated by the player and has four switches arranged vertically and horizontally. Is provided.
The lower panel 6 is provided with a lower speaker 19b for outputting sound effects and the like, a firing operation handle 24 for launching a game ball, and an ashtray 2.
Furthermore, in FIG. 24, what is shown by the code | symbol 18 is a decoration lamp which uses LED (light emitting diode) provided in the front surface of the glass frame 15 as a light emission source, and what is shown by the codes | symbols 16 and 16 is the glass frame 15 of FIG. It is a plurality of moving lights provided on the lower front surface. Although not shown, the moving lights 16 and 16 include LEDs as light emission sources and motors as drive sources. Here, the decorative lamp 18 and the moving lights 16, 16 constitute a decorative display LED 141 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 24, reference numerals 19 a and 19 a denote upper speakers that output sound effects and the like provided on the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 15.

B. 25. In FIG. 25, reference numeral 31 denotes a guide rail of the game board 30. As described above, a game area 32 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 31. ing.
In the game area 32, as shown in FIG. 25, an out-ball inlet 30a, a center case 40, a first starting winning port 36, a second starting winning port 37 as a normal electric accessory (general power), a variable winning device 38, a general winning opening 35, a general start gate 34, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided outside the game area 32 of the game board 30. Note that the game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 32, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the mounting portion such as the center case.

Here, the above-described out-ball inflow port 30a is a portion into which a ball that has passed through the game area and the game result is out (out) flows in, and is a concept different from the number of outs described later.
That is, all the balls launched into the game area 32 by the operation of the launch solenoid 773 described later, except for the foul balls, will be played in the process of flowing down the game area 32, and the balls won in any of the winning openings. Is a safe (winning), and a ball that does not win any of the winning mouths results in a game result of out. In that case, the safe ball generates a prize ball, but in the case of an enclosed ball game machine, the prize ball number is only electronically added to the number of possessed balls, and no real ball is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 27, the safe ball flows into the game ball inlet 171 for taking in the collected ball from the board surface (game area 32).
On the other hand, an out ball that does not win any of the winning holes becomes a game result of out (out), and after passing through the out ball inlet 30a, flows into the game ball inlet 171 for taking in the collected balls from the board surface (game area 32). To do.
In addition, although the ball that became a foul was fired to the game area 32 by the operation of the launch solenoid 773, it did not reach the game area 32, so that it flowed into the game ball inlet 171 without generating a game result. Again, it will return to the launch position.
The number of outs described later is a concept including a safe (winning) ball and an out (out) ball. In short, a game result is generated by passing through the game area 32 and externally (in this case) This is a ball that is collected outside the board (not outside the gaming machine) and does not include a foul ball. Therefore, the number of balls that go out of the game board 30 after the game is ended is referred to as an out number. On the other hand, the foul ball once goes out of the game board 30 but is not included in the number of outs because the game has not ended. The number of outs is detected by an out sphere detection switch 763 shown in FIG. 29 described later, and the foul sphere is detected by a foul sphere detection switch 762 shown in FIG. 29 described later.

The center case 40 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 25) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 29) attached to the back side of the game board 30. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 40 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance the production effect in cooperation with the production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 40 of the game board 30 (may be outside the game area 32). It should be noted that lamps for effect or decoration provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) constitute a board decoration device 46. The electric combination provided in the center case 40 constitutes a board effect device 44. It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device may be provided at a place other than the center case 40 of the game board 30.

The display device 41 (production means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually called a variable display device. In addition, as the name of the display device 41, there are various names such as special figure display devices, symbol variation devices, variable symbol display devices, identification information variation devices, identification information variation display devices, etc. Items with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
Here, the display device 41 constitutes a first display device managed by the gaming machine.
In addition to the special figure, the display unit 41a can display an image for production such as a background image or a character image or an information notification image, or an image corresponding to a so-called common figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .

The start winning ports 36 and 37 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, the start winning ports 36 and 37 are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 36 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 37 has open / close members 37b on both the left and right sides, and when the open / close members 37b are opened in a reverse C shape, it is possible to win a prize. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 36 and 37 are arranged below the center portion of the center case 40.
The second start winning opening is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 38 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 38d that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 38c. The special winning opening 38d is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and a game ball can be won.

As described above, for example, an image of a normal map is also displayed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 in addition to the special drawing. The general game will be described as follows. In this case, the display device 41 corresponds to a general-purpose display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, the variable display game of the normal map by the variable display of the normal map is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
When a normal hit is reached, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 37b of the second start winning opening 37 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
In addition, during the above-described variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general figure start gate 34, the display unit 41a or the like (even if a unique general figure start memory display is arranged separately from the display device 41). (Preferably), the pending display of the usual figure start memory is executed, for example, up to four are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the above-mentioned usual figure variable display game is repeated based on the memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.

Here, the short time will be described as follows.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of implementations of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 37) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls). Hereinafter, such a state in which the time reduction is being executed is referred to as a normal power support state or a time reduction state.

Next, the collective display device 50 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (in some cases, a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. In other words, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
A detailed configuration of the collective display device 50 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 50 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit 41a of the above-described variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map displayed in the above are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, the special display and the general figure as viewed from the player indicate the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
As described above, the collective display device 50 (see FIG. 29 described later for details) may be difficult to be recognized by the player, but is directly controlled by the game control device 100 described later. It is what is used. For example, a special chart start memory display (special figure hold display) for a player that is more easily recognized by the player is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 or a plurality of game boards 30 as described above, for example. This is performed by a lamp (light emitting unit).

C. Next, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a back mechanism of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In FIG. 26, the main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 10 include an external information terminal board 71, a first card unit connection terminal board 72A, a second card unit connection terminal board 72B, an effect control device 300, and a game control device 100. , A payout control device 200, a circulation device 155, a polishing device 156, a firing device 157, a power supply device 400, a polishing control device 159, and the like.
In addition, there is no component equivalent to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

The external information terminal board 71 is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 10 side and the card unit 600 side, and only transmits information unilaterally from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card unit 600 side. There is no input from the side to the pachinko machine 10 side. In particular, the external information terminal board 71 is used to output game information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 186 (described later) via the card unit 600.
On the other hand, the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B are also substrates for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 10 side and the card unit 600 side, but from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card unit 600 side. It is a board for wiring connection that not only transmits information to the card unit but also allows input from the card unit 600 side to the pachinko machine 10 side. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 10 and the card unit 600.
Also, the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B are divided into two terminal plates, which are divided into the dispensing control device 200 and the operation display device 7, respectively. This is for connection with the unit 600. That is, the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A connects the payout control device 200 and the card unit 600, and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B connects the operation display device 7 and the card unit 600. .
Further, the wiring from the switching circuit 820 is connected to the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B, so that the card unit 600 passes through the switching circuit 820 via the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B. Thus, information can be transmitted to and from the effect control device 300 (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29).
In the present embodiment, the external information terminal board 71, the first card unit connection terminal board 72A, and the second card unit connection terminal board 72B are separated from each other. You may make it do.
The effect control device 300 drives and controls the display device 41, the lower speaker 19b, the upper speakers 19a, 19a, and the like based on a control command output from the game control device 100, and realizes this control function in a predetermined case. A circuit board is accommodated.

  The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that manages a game such as a special drawing, and includes various switches, solenoids, Electric components such as lamps (electrical accessories) are electrically controlled, and control information is sent to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game, including a microcomputer that performs these controls A circuit board on which a circuit is formed is housed in a predetermined case 161. The case 161 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by the four crimping portions 162a, 162b, 162c, and 162d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the game control device 100, an inspection device connection terminal 163 to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 10 is connected is arranged.

  The payout control device 200 manages the number of encapsulated balls and the number of balls held (payout control board), and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer for performing the control is formed is housed in a predetermined case 164. It becomes the composition. The case 164 has a security structure that prevents easy opening by four caulking portions 165a, 165b, 165c, and 165d. In other words, in a state where the crimped portion is sealed, the structure cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is destroyed. Further, only the number of times corresponding to the number of crimped portions can be sealed. On the back side of the payout control device 200, an inspection device connection terminal 166 to which a cable for the inspection of the pachinko machine 10 by the authorities is connected, an error display LED 250 that lights (or blinks) when a predetermined abnormality occurs, and an error is released An error cancel switch 227 is provided for this purpose.

The circulation device 155 is for circulating the encapsulated spheres enclosed in the pachinko machine 10, and a polishing device 156 is disposed in the circulation path portion (details will be described later).
The launching device 157 launches a sphere, and is configured such that a device that realizes this function is housed in a predetermined case. The power supply apparatus 400 uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100V) as an input power supply, and supplies necessary power to each control device and each electronic component of the pachinko machine 10 from this input power supply. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, an AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands and the AC 24 V may be used as an input power source.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the circulation device 155.
In FIG. 27, the circulation device 155 is formed in a flat plate structure having a predetermined thickness, and a flow path (described later) for circulating an enclosed ball (enclosed game ball) is formed therein. In addition, a polishing device 156 is disposed in the flow path portion of the circulation device 155. The flow path in the circulation device 155 constitutes a circulation path for the encapsulated sphere. In addition, a game ball inlet 171 for taking in a collected ball from the board surface (game region 32) is opened at the upper part of the circulation device 155 in FIG.
As described above, the safe ball and the out ball that have finished the game in the game area 32 are taken in the game ball entrance 171 as the collection balls, and the foul balls that have become fouls without being launched into the game area 32 are also collected balls. Is taken in as. Since the foul ball has not reached the game area 32, no game result is generated, but it flows into the game ball inlet 171 and returns to the launch position again.
The polishing device 156 polishes the encapsulated sphere, and the sphere that has flowed from the lower inlet 172 is lifted by the lifting screw 173 by the power of the polishing motor 170, and the polishing member 174 (for example, a polishing cloth) disposed therein is used. ) Is polished and discharged from the upper outlet 175 via the polishing outlet switch 176. The polishing outlet switch 176 detects a sphere discharged from the upper outlet 175, and if the polishing outlet switch 176 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 175 for a certain time or more, an abnormality such as a clogged ball in the polishing device 156 is detected. Thus, the polishing motor 170 of the polishing apparatus 156 is prevented from continuing to rotate.
Note that the sphere flows into the polishing device 156 through the polishing inflow guide path 180 in which the sphere is switched by the switching valve 179 via the ball feed channel 178 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 177 in the circulation device 155. In other cases, the switching valve 179 blocks the inflow of the sphere into the polishing inflow guide path 180.

In other words, in a state where the encapsulated sphere does not flow into the polishing device 156 (hereinafter referred to as encapsulated sphere circulation), the circulator 155 is connected to the out sphere (including the safe sphere) and the foul from the game sphere inlet 171 opened at the top of the circulator 155. The sphere is caused to flow into the sensor flow path 177, and the sphere is moved downward by gravity. Thus, the sphere that has flowed down from the game sphere inlet 171 by its own weight causes the first enclosed sphere detection switch 764 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second Ball feed for firing a ball through a ball feed channel 178 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 177 after passing through the sensor channel 177 in which the enclosed ball detection switch 765 (encapsulated ball detection 2SW) is arranged. It is configured to be sent to the device (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 27). A switching valve 179 is provided in front of the ball feeding device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 27) in the ball feeding flow path 178. The switching valve 179 is provided with a switching solenoid 179S (see FIG. 29), and is a position that prevents a part of the ball feed flow path 178 from being slid by the switching solenoid 179S and opening the polishing guide port 180a during the enclosed ball circulation. The sealed ball type is not moved to the lower polishing inflow guide path 180.
Therefore, during the enclosed ball circulation, the enclosed ball, which is a collection ball from the board surface (game board 30), flows from the game ball inlet 171 and passes through the sensor flow path 177 and passes through the ball feed flow path 178. The ball sent to the ball feeding device for launching the ball and being sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 32 along the guide rail 31 by the power of the launch solenoid 773 (shown in FIG. 29) of the launch device. Then, the route is repeatedly circulated through a path of becoming an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball and flowing again from the game ball inlet 171 as a collected ball.

Here, as described above, the switching valve 179 does not slide the switching solenoid 179S, the switching valve 179 urges the valve body by the spring to close the polishing guide port 180a, and the sealed ball does not flow into the polishing device 156. (Encapsulated ball circulation) corresponds to a normal state in which the game ball is circulated through the game board 30 inside the pachinko machine 10 without using the polishing device 156, and this route is referred to as a game circulation route. Therefore, the game circulatory path is such that the encapsulated sphere, which is a recovered sphere from the board surface, is a game ball inlet 171, a sensor flow path 177, a ball feed flow path 178, a ball feed apparatus, and the launch solenoid 773 of the launch apparatus launches the ball onto the board surface. Under the flow of the board surface, the route passes again through the game ball entrance 171 as a collection ball.

On the other hand, when circulating the encapsulated sphere by flowing the encapsulated sphere into the polishing device 156 instead of circulating the encapsulated sphere, before the ball feeding device (the device provided on the left end side in FIG. 27) in the ball feeding channel 178. The provided switching valve 179 slides a part of the ball feed channel 178 by the switching solenoid 179S to open the polishing guide port 180a, and the encapsulated sphere is moved by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guide channel 180 through the polishing guide port 180a. Operates to move. As a result, the encapsulated sphere existing in the sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178 passes through the polishing guide port 180a by gravity and is guided to the lower polishing inflow guide path 180, flows through the polishing inflow guide path 180, and flows into the lower inlet. From 172, it flows into the polishing device 156, and ball polishing is performed. When the polishing by the polishing device 156 is completed, the ball is discharged from the upper outlet 175 to the sensor flow path 177 via the polishing outlet switch 176, and flows again into the polishing device 156 from the lower inlet 172 via the above-described path. The ball will be polished. Therefore, during the ball polishing, the ball polishing by the polishing apparatus 156 is performed by circulating through the above-described path.
Here, as described above, the switching valve 179 slides a part of the ball feed passage 178 by the switching solenoid 179S to open the polishing guide port 180a, and the encapsulated sphere flows into the lower polishing through the polishing guide port 180a by gravity. A state in which the encapsulated sphere is moved to the guide path 180 and the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 156 (during encapsulated sphere polishing) corresponds to a sphere polishing state in which the encapsulated sphere is guided to the polishing device 156 and is polished. That's it. Accordingly, the polishing circulation path includes the enclosing sphere as the sensor flow path 177, the ball feed flow path 178, the polishing guide port 180a, the polishing inflow guide path 180, the lower inlet 172, the polishing device 156, the upper outlet 175, the polishing outlet switch 176, and the sensor again. The flow path 177 becomes a path of discharge.
The switching valve 179 constitutes a path switching means for switching to either the polishing circulation path or the game circulation path.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 27, the sensor flow path 177 into which the ball that has flowed in from the game ball inlet 171 and the ball that has been discharged from the upper outlet 175 of the polishing apparatus 156 flows is loosened to reduce the momentum of the ball flowing down. It has an inclined shape. Then, the sphere that has flowed into the sensor flow path 177 is, by its own weight, the sensor flow path 177 in which the first enclosed sphere detection switch 764 (encapsulated sphere detection 1SW) and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 765 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW) are arranged. Then, the ball is fed to a ball feeding device (device provided on the left end side in FIG. 27) for firing a ball through a ball feeding channel 178 provided subsequent to the sensor channel 177.
Here, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 764 is provided so as to detect a sphere located at a position lower than the second enclosed sphere detection switch 765 on the relatively downstream side of the sensor flow path 177. On the other hand, the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 765 is positioned higher than the first encapsulated sphere detection switch 764 on the relatively upstream side of the sensor channel 177 (upstream side of the first enclosed sphere detection switch 764). It is provided to detect a sphere. The first enclosed ball detection switch 764 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 765 detects the upper limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball. It is a sensor. This is because the encapsulated spheres need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 10 without excess or deficiency, and the current number of encapsulated spheres is checked to be at least the minimum and below the maximum, respectively. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls. The sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178 may or may not be provided as an integrated flow path.

Of the circulation path through which the enclosing ball circulates, the downstream flow path (the flow path comprising the sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178) through which the game balls collected from the game area flow toward the launch position is As shown in FIG. 27, the vicinity of the launch position (the vicinity of the leftmost ball feeder in FIG. 27) is inclined downward or downward toward the vicinity of the launch position as shown in FIG. The first encapsulated ball detection switch 764 is arranged to detect the game ball at the first position in the downstream flow path, and the second encapsulated ball detection switch 765 is the first encapsulated ball detection switch 765 in the downstream flow path. It arrange | positions so that the game ball in the 2nd position upstream from a position may be detected. Here, the first position is the most upstream game ball when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the minimum number within the appropriate range of the number of enclosed balls (the number of enclosed game balls). Is set to a position where the first enclosed ball detection switch 764 detects. In addition, the second position is such that when a number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 765 detects the game ball, and the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls is detected. The second enclosing ball detection switch 765 is set to a position where the game ball is not detected when the game balls are accumulated in the downstream flow path by the maximum number of the game balls.

In addition, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the enclosing sphere flow path (the flow path including the sensor flow path 177, the ball feed flow path 178, and the polishing inflow guide path 180) in the circulation device 155 is inside. The game ball is visible from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 10). Thereby, the state of the flow of the sphere in the circulation device 155, the presence or absence of the occurrence of clogging, and the state of the number of encapsulated spheres can be visually confirmed. For example, the flow path of the encapsulated sphere is made of a transparent or semi-transparent member, or a predetermined number of internal viewing openings (thin slits, a plurality of minute holes, etc.) large enough to prevent the sphere from flowing out are formed. By comprising with the made member, it becomes the structure which can visually recognize an internal ball | bowl from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, for example, by forming the entire back wall of the circulation device 155 with a transparent member, as shown in FIG. 27, a sensor flow path 177, a ball feed flow path 178, and a polishing inflow guide path 180 are provided. It is good also as a structure which can visually recognize the whole inside. Preferably, at least in the downstream flow path (the sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178), the internal sphere can be visually recognized from the outside, whereby the number of enclosed spheres can be visually confirmed. ing. Although not shown, a mark may be formed on the circulation device 155 so that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate by this visual confirmation. For example, marks (indicating signs) may be formed on the back side of the circulation device 155 at a predetermined number of 20 positions of the encapsulated sphere. In this way, when adding a sphere when the encapsulated sphere is insufficient, it is easy to understand because it is sufficient to add up to this mark. Also, if there is an excess of encapsulated spheres, it is easy to understand because it is only necessary to pass the sphere to this mark.

  In addition, the ball feeding device is a device that sends the balls that have flowed down the ball feeding flow path 178 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 157 using the ball feeding solenoid 772 shown in FIGS. The ball sent to the launch position can be launched toward the game area 32 along the guide rail 31 by the power of the launch solenoid 773 (shown in FIG. 29) of the launch device 157. As shown in FIG. 27, this ball feeding device is provided with a shot ball detection SW 161. The fire ball detection SW 161 is a sensor that detects the balls to be fired one by one.

D. Next, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a system configuration of a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed.
In FIG. 28, the game hall includes a card management device 181, a card issuing machine 182, a card settlement machine 183, a prize exchange device 184, a ball management device 185, a hall computer 186, a number of pachinko machines 10a to 10n, and card units 600a to 600a. 600n is arranged.
In addition, an external management device 191 is disposed outside the game hall.
The card management device 181 is connected to a card company (not shown) via a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN), and the card company receives various information of the card management device 181 as necessary. . The amusement hall is connected to the card company via a telephone line in order to obtain or inquire about card issuance information or necessary information from the card company.

The card management apparatus 181 includes a card issuing machine 182, a card settlement machine 183, and a prize exchange apparatus 1.
84, the ball holding management device 185, and the card units 600a to 600n are connected to each other via the information transmission path 187 and are connected to the hall computer 186 via the information transmission path 188.
The card management device 181 treats the card issuer 182, the card settlement machine 183, the gift exchange device 184, the ball management device 185, and a large number of card units 600 a to 600 n as terminal devices, and manages information of these terminal devices In addition to performing control, identification information (card ID) of a game card (member card or visitor card) inserted / extracted into each terminal device, information on the number of balls lent or stored in each game card (valuable) Control processing for storing and managing value information) is performed. For example, processing for updating and storing the balance of the ball lending number for each card ID is performed by obtaining necessary information from each card unit, the card issuing machine 182 and the like.

The card issuer 182 issues a card (storage medium) purchased from a card company to a player as a membership card, and adds, for example, 1000 yen, 2000 yen, 3000 yen, and 5000 yen ball lending (value). And issue the card. The card issuing machine 182 transfers information (for example, the card ID of the card, the number of balls lent or sales information) to the card management apparatus 181 via the information transmission path 187 and issues the card. Perform the necessary control.
Note that the game card includes a membership card and a visitor card. The membership card is issued after registering as a member, and the number of ball lending (corresponding to a ball lending amount), the number of balls held, and the number of balls stored can be registered. The visitor card is a card for a player who is not a member, is stocked in the card unit 600, and is issued in the card unit 600 when cash is inserted into the card unit 600 as will be described later. This visitor card can register the number of balls lending and the number of balls held, but not the number of balls stored. In addition, the number of balls held is valid only on that day, and the number of balls stored can be used by changing to the number of balls held at a later date. In this specification, it is described that the number of balls held corresponds to the game value, but the number of stored balls corresponds to the same valuable value as the number of balls lent.

The card settlement machine 183 is used to settle the game card based on the ball credit balance of the game card (visitor card or member card). For example, an amount corresponding to the ball credit balance is returned in cash. The card settlement machine 183 also has a function of transferring information (for example, information on the number of spheres) to the card management apparatus 181 via the information transmission path 187.
The prize exchange device 184 performs processing for exchanging with a prize desired by the player based on the number of balls held by the game card. For example, a store clerk at the game hall operates the prize exchange device 184 to give the player a prize. Give away a free gift. In the gift exchange device 184, in the case of a membership card, it is also possible to perform storage processing by exchanging the number of balls held for the number of balls stored.
When exchanging a prize or storing a prize, the prize exchanging device 184 transmits the card ID of the game card and the number of balls stored in the game card to the ball management device 185 (in this example, For example, it is transmitted from the prize exchange device 184 to the ball management device 185). The ball management device 185 compares the received card ID and the number of balls with the card ID and the number of balls stored in the ball number-of-cards file stored in the ball management device 185 described later. If the result of collation by the holding ball management device 185 is transmitted to the free gift exchange device 184 as correct / incorrect information, the received free gift exchange device 184 can know whether the number of held balls stored in the game card is correct or not.
The prize exchange device 184 transmits only the card ID of the game card to the ball management device 185, and transmits the number of balls stored in the number-of-balls storage file of the ball management device 185 described later. You may request that you do. In this way, the prize exchange device 184 can know whether the number of balls stored in the game card is correct or not by comparing the received number of balls with the number of balls stored in the game card. .

The ball management device 185 is connected to a card management device 181, a card issuing machine 182, a card settlement machine 183, a gift exchange device 184, and a large number of card units 600 a to 600 n, and a player is based on information from each of these devices. Information on the number of balls possessed by (game value information)
Control is performed to store and manage. For example, control processing is performed such as storing the number of balls held in association with a card ID (card identification information) in a storage area called a number-of-balls file for each card.
The card units 600a to 600n are arranged adjacent to the pachinko machines 10a to 10n, respectively, and are connected as described above so that information can be transmitted. The number of balls and external information (various game information output from each pachinko machine 10a to 10n) is transmitted from a large number of pachinko machines 10a to 10n to the card units 600a to 600n.
The ball management device 185 can also communicate with the hall computer 186 via the card management device 181, and has a function of performing processing according to collation of ball number data from the hall computer 186.

The card units 600a to 600n, when a game card is inserted, read the game card information (ball lending number data, etc.) and perform processing for lending the ball, or the number of balls possessed by the player ( (Which may be encrypted) is stored in a game card, and information is transferred to / from the card management device 181 via the information transmission path 187.
The card units 600a to 600n are configured to periodically receive the number of balls and external information (various game information as described above) from the pachinko machines 10a to 10n, respectively. The card units 600a to 600n transmit external information collected from a number of pachinko machines 10a to 10n (various game information output from the pachinko machines 10a to 10n) to the hall computer 186 via the information transmission path 187. To do.

The hall computer 186 is installed in the game room management room, and is connected to the card units 600a to 600n via the information transmission path 187. The pachinko machines 10a to 10n are connected to the card units 600a to 600n. Is collected from the card management device 181 via the information transmission path 188, and necessary data is collected from the ball management device 185 via the card management device 181 to correspond to various gaming states. It organizes the data to be played and manages the business of the game hall.
Specifically, necessary data is collected from a large number of pachinko machines 10a to 10n via the card units 600a to 600n, and necessary data is collected from the ball management device 185 via the card management device 181. Arrange data corresponding to various game states, display the arranged data on the display, and perform calculation processing of data necessary for business. Although different from the present embodiment, the external information (various game information) transmitted to the hall computer 186 via the card units 600a to 600n is transmitted directly from the pachinko machines 10a to 10n to the hall computer 186. It is good.

The external management device 191 is connected to the card management device 181 via the information transmission path 192, and is managed by a third party by being arranged outside the game hall, and is related to the game card of the game hall outside the store. It has a function to back up information.
For example, data such as the number of stored balls for each gaming card, IDs of a large number of gaming cards, and IDs of a large number of gaming machines are collected via the card management device 181 to manage the number of stored balls for each gaming card and ID management of the gaming card. Each process (including data backup) such as management of the gaming machine ID is performed. In addition, if there is an inquiry from the game hall, the data is supplied as necessary. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machines 10a to 10n are powered on, the gaming machine ID (or the payout unique ID (the payout control device unique) ID including ID) can be verified, and the verification result can be transmitted to the game hall.
The external management device 191 provides information on management of the number of stored balls for each game card of a customer to a trusted institution when the game hall quits business and closes.

E. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 10 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 10 includes a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a payout control device 200, a polishing control device 159, and a power supply device 400 as main components of the control system. Each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG. 29 are supplied with necessary power from the power supply device 400.
Here, a device (conventional game control device) that controls the progress of the game with a device (payout control device) that performs enclosed ball control (control of the number of enclosed balls, control of addition / subtraction processing of the number of balls, etc.) Are separated from each other. By separating them as described above, the program of each control device is simplified, and the control burden is reduced. For example, a device in which such a payout control device and a game control device are integrated may be provided as the game control device 100. In this case, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the payout control device become unnecessary, and the control burden is reduced, and space and power can be saved.

(Game control device related)
First, a configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 10 and devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that manages games such as special drawings, and includes a CPU 111A, a ROM 111B, a RAM 111C, a test test terminal 115 for an inspection device, and an inspection device connection terminal 163. Yes.
The game control device 100 constitutes a control device and game control means.

The CPU 111A executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 111B stores a game program, and the RAM 111C is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program.
The RAM 111C is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is recovered from the power failure within the continuous time, the data in the RAM 111C is retained.
Note that the CPU 111A, the ROM 111B, and the RAM 111C correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured, for example, as an IC for an amusement chip.
The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111A to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in a test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the game control device 100 used in a game arcade.
The inspection device connection terminal 163 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 10 is connected after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 36a (start port 1SW in FIG. 29), a second start port switch 37a (start port 2SW in FIG. 29), a gate switch 34a, a winning port switch 35a, a count switch 38a, Detection signals from the magnet sensor 61, the radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 144 are input.
The first start port switch 36a is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the game balls won in the first start winning port 36 one by one, and the second start port switch 37a wins the second start winning port 37. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the gaming balls one by one.
The count switch 38a is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize winning opening 38d of the variable prize winning device 38. The prize opening switch 35a is a similar sensor provided for the general prize opening 35. When there are n general prize openings, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 34a is a sensor that detects the game balls passing through the usual start gate 34 one by one.
Each of the sensors 36a, 37a, 34a, 35a, and 38a for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

When the game control device 100 has won a winning opening, it sends a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of possessed balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 100.
In addition, the game control device 100 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning on the winning display LED 355 of the collective display device 50 when the winning opening is won.

Specifically, when the game control device 100 has won a winning opening, the game control device 100 determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning and adds the number of winning balls to the number of held balls (a winning ball command) ) Is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200. The winning awards are all winning awards with a prize ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). There are a large winning opening 38d and a general winning opening 35 of the variable winning apparatus 38.
And in the game control apparatus 100, the number of prize balls accompanying a winning is set as follows.
・ Large winning opening 38d = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 36 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 37 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 35 = 10

The magnet sensor 61 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10 and for detecting fraud caused by the magnet. The radio wave sensor 62 is a sensor that detects the transmission of radio waves. For example, the radio wave sensor 62 is used to detect that an illegal radio wave is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 using a radio wave oscillator or the like. The vibration sensor 144 is a sensor that detects that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and is particularly for detecting unauthorized vibration such as shaking the table (or hitting it abnormally).
The game control device 100 determines fraud based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 61, the radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 144. Then, processing such as causing the display device 41 to perform an error display effect is performed under the control of the effect control device 300. In addition, the game control device 100 transmits the fraud information to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 transmits the fraud information to the hall computer 186 via the card unit 600.

Next, the game control device 100 is connected to the effect control device 300, the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the special prize opening solenoid 38b, and the collective display device 50 as necessary devices for the progress and effect of the game.
The general electric solenoid 37c is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 37b of the second start winning port 37, and the large winning port solenoid 38b is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member 38c of the variable winning device 38. The game control device 100 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the special prize opening solenoid 38b, and the collective display device 50.
Further, data (for example, an effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.
Further, the game control device 100 is configured to transmit data (for example, a command necessary for managing the enclosed ball (for example, a prize ball number command)) to the payout control device 200 by serial communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 manages the number of encapsulated spheres and the number of balls held (payout control board). A launch control circuit 266, an error release switch (error release SW) 227, and an error display LED 250 are provided.
The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out the winning ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100 (the paying out of the winning ball is added to the number of balls held). On the other hand, the payout control device 200 can transmit frame opening information (information indicating whether or not the opening of the front frame 12 is detected by the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64) to the card unit 600. (Details will be described later).
Although not shown in FIG. 29, as shown in FIG. 31 described later, a switch power supply that supplies main power to the dispensing control device 200 with a delay of a predetermined time to a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is supplied. A delay circuit 941 is provided (details will be described later).
The payout control device 200 constitutes a control device, an enclosed ball control means, a counting means, a counting operation control means, an input period limiting means, a game value storage means, a game value display control means, a polishing control means, a delay means, and a clear control means. .

The CPU 211A executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or rental ball payout), and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 211B stores the program, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.
Here, the RAM 211C constitutes a game value storage means, and stores the number of possessed balls as the game value. Specifically, the RAM 211C stores a change in the player's game value, and subtracts the fired ball to win the prize ball. By repeating the addition of the number, the player's number of balls will be updated and stored in real time. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 211C (game value storage means) stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.
Further, the RAM 211C is provided with backup power supply means (not shown, for example, composed of a large-capacitance capacitor) for supplying power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the time during which the power can be continuously supplied, the data in the RAM 211C is retained.

Note that the payout control device 200 specifically performs processing from launching to collection of the encapsulated ball as a control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 100 In addition, the present embodiment is configured to perform ball lending control (ball lending addition processing), counting the number of balls, and the like.
Further, when the payout control device 200 receives a prize at the winning opening, a prize ball number command corresponding to the winning is sent from the game control device 100, so that a prize corresponding to the winning is based on the prize ball number command. A process of adding the number of balls to the number of possessed balls is performed (as described above). For example, when there is a continuous change in the number of possessed balls (game value) of the player, The memory of the number is updated immediately. However, when the number-of-balls display 3 (game value display means) displays the number of balls of the player, the number of balls is updated for a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds). ) Is controlled at intervals.
Specifically, the RAM 211C as an internal memory stores a change in the number of balls held by the player, and subtracts the fired ball, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball to repeat the game. It will be updated and stored in real time how much the number of balls the person will have. On the other hand, the payout control device 200 subtracts the number of balls fired from the number of balls held, adds the number of prize balls, and adds a foul ball by processing based on the game program, so that the RAM 211C can determine the number of balls held in real time. Memorize changes. In contrast, the payout controller 200 updates the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 3 displays the number of balls of the player, and the RAM 211C updates and stores the number of balls in real time. Unlike the above, control is performed so that the updated number of balls is displayed at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).
The test firing test terminal 264 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information in the control of the enclosed ball and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 211A to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 264 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 200 used in the game hall.
The inspection device connection terminal 265 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 10 is connected after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  The launch control circuit 266 is configured to be built in the payout control device 200, and is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 266 is required to receive the ON data of the launch permission signal, and the launch solenoid that launches the game ball at the launch position according to the operation of the launch volume 771 (that is, the rotation operation of the launch operation handle 24) 773 is controlled. Further, signals from the touch sensor 774 and the firing stop switch 775 are input to the payout control device 200. The touch sensor 774 detects whether or not the player is touching the firing operation handle 24 that operates the firing volume 771, and the launch stop switch 775 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball. It is operated by a player.

Note that the ball feed solenoid 772 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 200. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 774 is input to the payout control device 200.
A device that includes the above-described launch solenoid 773 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) into a game area is referred to as a launch device 157. This launching device 157 is controlled by the payout control device 200 including the firing control circuit 266, and a state where the launching of the game ball is permitted by the control processing of these control devices (a state where on-data of the launching permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls. In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), the game ball is fired even if there is a game ball at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 24. Not. In addition, the launching device 157 has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (the tip) has a launch position.
Since the number of game balls fired by operating the firing operation handle 24 is regulated to be 100 shots per minute according to a predetermined rule, the payout control device 200 and the launch control circuit 266 control the ball feed solenoid 772. , Within a range of 100 shots / minute (approximately one shot in 0.6 seconds (s)).

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 68 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
When there is an error in the payout control process, the error display LED 250 lights a specific number according to the content of the error.
Further, the payout control device 200 is connected to the number-of-balls indicator 3, the counting switch 811, the break switch 812, the counting ball indicator 813, and the counting ball use switch 814 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 6. Yes. As will be described later, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 600 via the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B and is managed and controlled by the card unit 600, and thus is not under the control of the payout control device 200. It is a configuration.
The payout control device 200 receives detection signals from the counting switch 811, the rest switch 812, and the counting ball use switch 814, and outputs necessary control signals to the holding ball number display 3 and the counting ball display 813. In addition, necessary control signals are output to the LEDs built in the counting switch 811, the rest switch 812, and the counting ball use switch 814.
For example, in order to display the number of balls held, the ball number indicator 3 outputs a drive signal that can drive six LEDs of the seven segments of the ball number indicator 3. When there is a counting ball, the counting ball indicator 813 is configured to output a signal for lighting it. In addition, for the LEDs built in the counting switch 811, the break switch 812, and the counting ball use switch 814, a driving signal capable of lighting each LED is output when the condition for lighting each LED is satisfied.

Here, the concepts such as the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are organized and described as follows.
・ Number of balls: Number of balls that can be fired ・ Number of balls to be counted: Number of stored balls moved from the number of balls held (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired)
Specifically, the number of balls possessed is the number of balls that the player has acquired and can be fired. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, the ball that can be fired on the upper plate or the lower plate It corresponds to a number of images, and it is a ball that has not moved to the ball box.
On the other hand, the number of counted balls is the number of stored balls moved by counting from the number of balls held by the player. In the example of a gaming machine using real balls, It corresponds to the image of the number of balls moved out of the ball box, and it is the ball in the ball box. By operating the counting switch 811, the number of balls can be moved to the number of counting balls.
Total number of balls: The total number of balls held by the player, which is represented by the number of balls held + the number of balls counted = the total number of balls held.
・ Number of updated balls: Changed number of balls from previous number of balls ・ Number of updated balls: Number of changed balls from previous number of counted balls ・ Use of counting balls: Move the ball from the number of counting balls to the number of balls In detail, “Using counting balls” is an example of a game machine that uses real balls. In the example of a game machine that uses real balls, the balls (counting balls) that have moved from the upper plate or lower plate to the ball box are moved again to the upper plate. This corresponds to the concept of moving (back) and using. In order to use the counting ball, it is only necessary to operate the counting ball use switch 814, and a predetermined amount (for example, 100) of balls moves from the counting ball number to the number of holding balls by one operation. .
・ Number of stored balls: Number of balls that can be replayed after the game on the gaming machine has been completed and the player has stored the total number of balls stored on the membership card. It is possible to play again using the or to exchange prizes. If you move the table, you will play again using the current day's storage, but if you are a guest member, you will not be able to store the ball but simply use the stored ball data recorded on the game card to replay it on another table. Will play.
In the case of payment, the total number of balls is written in the game card. At this time, the total number of balls held is sent to the card unit 600, and the card unit 600 performs settlement processing.
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “number of balls that can be fired” and “number of balls to be counted” are both included in the “number of balls held” acquired by the player in terms of a broad concept. The explanation is divided according to the state of storage.

In the present embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are configured to be managed by the payout control device 200, and these data are stored and held in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200.
The data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent to the card unit 600 and can be displayed on the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 600. ing. However, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are displayed on the operation display device 7. However, the increase and decrease of the number of balls and the management of the number of balls counted and stored after counting from the number of balls held are only used for the payout control device 200. Has come to control. The card unit 600 periodically receives data from the payout control device 200 and displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls on the operation display device 7 based on the received data.
Further, the data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 200 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 270 is controlled by the effect control device 300. The decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 270a and the lower decorative ball display device 270b.

Specifically, the number of balls held and the number of counting balls are displayed by the following devices.
・ Number-of-balls indicator 3: Digitally displays the number of balls held (managed by the payout control device 200)
Counting ball indicator 813: Displays the presence or absence of a counting ball (lights up when there is a counting ball) (managed by the payout control device 200)
-Decoration ball display device 270: Analog decoration display of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls by a large number of LEDs (managed by the production control device 300)
-Operation display device 7: Displays details of the number of balls and counting balls in digital or analog (managed by card unit 600)

The payout control device 200 is connected to the card unit 600 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A, and bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 600. Therefore, the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A is mainly used for input / output of information, signals, and the like between the card unit 600 and the payout control device 200 on the pachinko machine 10 side.
Then, the payout control device 200 displays the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 3, counts the number of balls by operating the counting switch 811, and shifts it to the number of counted balls (concept of moving to a so-called ball box). It is possible to do. In addition, when the number of balls held is counted and transferred to the counting ball number, the payout control device 200 performs control to turn on the counting ball display 813 by determining that there is the counting ball number.
Here, the control concept of “counting the number of balls and transferring them to the ball box of the number of balls” is an example of a game machine that pays out with real balls. This is the same as the work of physically transferring to an external ball box (details will be described later).
In addition, when the counting ball use switch 814 is operated, the payout control device 200 also performs control to move a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) from the counting ball number to the holding ball number by one operation.
On the other hand, the payout control device 200 transmits data on the number of balls held and the number of counted balls to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 controls the lighting / flashing of the decorative ball display device 270. It is configured to do.

Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 200 is connected to the card unit 600 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A. Various information in the enclosed ball game (for example, various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) is sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Note that the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are not changed, but the actual number at that time is transmitted, so that it is not necessary to take measures against data loss.
The card unit 600 manages the control of the operation display device 7 based on various information from the payout control device 200, and displays the number of player's balls (game value) and the number of counted balls in the message / operation area unit 806. To do.
In this example, as described above, various game information from the game control device 100 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls) are sent from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600. Although transmission is performed at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms), necessary information may be transmitted from the payout control device 200 when a request is made from the card unit 600. Further, the various types of information may be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the card unit 600 instead of from the payout control device 200.

On the other hand, the payout control device 200 is connected to the card unit 600 via the external information terminal board 71, and game information can be transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600.
The card unit 600 is connected to the hall computer 186 and the ball management device 185. Accordingly, the external information terminal board 71 is mainly used for transmitting game information from the payout control device 200 on the pachinko machine 10 side to the hall computer 186 and the ball management device 185 via the card unit 600.
Specifically, from the payout control device 200, via the external information terminal board 71, via the card unit 600, to the hall computer 186, various game information from the game control device 100 and control of the enclosed ball and payout control of the game ball. Various information in is output. The game information includes, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, and a prize at the start opening that is a condition for changing the symbol. Start signal to notify, symbol change start signal to trigger symbol variation start or symbol variation stop signal to trigger symbol variation, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state, time-short state) There are privilege status signals.
Further, the payout control device 200 outputs information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like to the card unit 600 via the external information terminal board 71, and further from the card unit 600 to the ball management device 185 and the hall computer 186. Information on the number of balls held (game value information) is output.

Next, as a signal from various switches necessary for the enclosed ball control or the like, the payout control device 200 includes a firing ball detection switch 761, a foul ball detection switch 762, an out ball detection switch 763, and a first enclosed ball detection switch 764. Detection signals from the enclosed sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 29 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 765 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 29) are input.
The shot ball detection switch 761 is a sensor that detects one ball at a time in the game area 32 by operating a shot volume 771 (details will be described later), and the foul ball detection switch 762 is a game area 32 of the shot. It is a sensor that detects the balls that have become fouls without reaching. The out ball detection switch 763 is a sensor that detects the balls collected from the game area 32 (including both out balls and safe balls) one by one.
As described above, the first enclosed sphere detection switch 764 and the second enclosed sphere detection switch 765 are arranged in the sensor flow path 177 of the circulation device 155 (see FIG. 27), and are for checking the number of enclosed spheres. .
The payout control device 200 receives the detection signals from the switches 761 to 765, monitors the behavior of the sphere from the launch of the encapsulated sphere to the collection, checks the presence or absence of a foul sphere, and checks the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated spheres. In addition to the above processing, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on ball lending information (ball lending number command) sent from the card unit 600.

Further, a glass frame opening switch (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 29) 63 and a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 (front frame opening SW (night monitoring SW) in FIG. 29) are connected to the dispensing control device 200. Has been.
The glass frame opening switch 63 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 15 is opened.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 12 is opened, and holds information that detects the opening of the front frame 12 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. It is configured. In particular, when the front frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened at night when the game hall is closed, information (for example, open ON data) that detects that the front frame 12 is opened is also displayed at night. keeping. When the pachinko machine 10 is activated the next morning, information indicating that the front frame 12 has been opened at night is detected by the payout control device 200 using a detection signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. By reading, it is taken into the payout control device 200. Therefore, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is also named “night monitoring switch”.
The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 may detect that the glass frame 15 is opened in addition to detecting that the front frame 12 is opened. In this way, it is possible to cope with fraud by opening the glass frame while omitting the glass frame opening switch 63 to reduce the cost.
Here, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 constitutes a front frame opening detection means.
Further, the main power supply from the payout control device 200 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 with a predetermined time delay from the start of the main power supply to the payout control device 200, and is backed up when the main power is shut off. Power is supplied (see FIG. 31 for details). As this backup power source, for example, as in the above-described RAM 211C, backup power source means (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even during a power failure is used, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off at night. Even in the case of power failure (or during a power failure), the backup power supply means continues to supply necessary power.
Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 12 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is input to the payout control device 200, stored in the RAM 211C, and transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600. (See the program below for details).

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, It has a tone generator LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command from the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, determines the contents of the effect, controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, and instructs the sound source LSI of the reproduced sound. The lower speaker 19b and the upper speaker 19a are driven to produce sound effects, etc., and the processing such as the drive control of the decoration display LED 141 described above is executed, and the content of the effect is determined according to the signal from the effect operation switch 25. Control the production.
Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to transmit the number of balls and the number of counted balls from the payout control device 200 via the game control device 100, and the effect control device 300 displays the decorative ball display. The device 270 performs lighting / flashing control of a large number of LEDs in the upper decorative ball display device 270a and the lower decorative ball display device 270b in accordance with the increase / decrease of the number of balls and the number of counting balls.
Furthermore, the production control device 300 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820, and information related to the production screen is sent from the production control device 300 via the switching circuit 820. The operation display device 7 transmits operation information and the like of various effect buttons arranged on the screen of the message / operation area unit 806 to the effect control device 300 via the switching circuit 820.
The effect control device 300 determines the effect contents of the display device 41 based on the operation information of various effect buttons received from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820 and controls the effect.
The second card unit connection terminal plate 72B is connected to the switching circuit 820, and the card unit 600 can input and output information and signals to and from the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820.
In this way, the switching circuit 820 connects the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 300 (game machine: pachinko machine 10, the same applies hereinafter) and the card unit 600 (however, via the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B). (See FIG. 30B).

Next, the effect control device 300 is connected to the polishing control device 159 as a device necessary for the processing of the game ball polishing. The polishing control device 159 includes an RTC (real time clock) 160 inside, and performs processing necessary for polishing the game ball by controlling the operation of the polishing device 156 based on an instruction from the effect control device 300. The RTC 160 is provided to enable control based on information such as date and time. For example, the production control device 300 can read the information of the RTC 160 to cause a special production to appear or freely set a time zone for polishing the game ball.
The production control device 300 exchanges signals with the polishing control device 159, and the polishing control device 159 sends a control signal (for example, forward rotation data) to the polishing motor 170 based on an instruction from the production control device 300. (Or a signal corresponding to the reverse rotation data) is output as appropriate, and upon receiving this control signal, the polishing motor 170 operates the polishing device 156 for polishing the encapsulated sphere enclosed in the pachinko machine 10 (forward or reverse). Actuated in the direction).
Specifically, the payout control apparatus 200 sets a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period, transmits a polishing start command to the game control apparatus 100 when polishing is started, and sends a polishing stop command to the game control apparatus 100 when polishing is stopped. Control to send. During the polishing period, game balls cannot be launched.
When the game control apparatus 100 receives a polishing start command from the payout control apparatus 200, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a polishing start command to the effect control apparatus 300, and receives a polishing stop command, and controls to transmit a polishing stop command to the effect control apparatus 300. Do.
When the production control device 300 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 100, it instructs the polishing control device 159 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from receiving the polishing start command to receiving the polishing stop command. Control to do.

The polishing control device 159 controls the polishing device 156 to perform polishing only for a predetermined period in accordance with a polishing instruction from the effect control device 300. In this case, the polishing control device 159 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere such as driving of the polishing motor 170 and operation of the switching solenoid 179S in accordance with a polishing device program described later.
That is, a polishing motor 170, a switching solenoid 179S, and a polishing outlet switch 176 are connected to the polishing control device 159. The polishing motor 170 is sealed inside the pachinko machine 10 based on a control signal from the polishing control device 159. The polishing apparatus 156 for polishing the encapsulated sphere is operated (operated in the forward direction or the reverse direction). The switching solenoid 179S opens the polishing guide port 180a when polishing the encapsulated sphere. Normally (when the encapsulated sphere is not polished), the switching solenoid 179S is guided by the valve body of the switching valve 179 (details not shown). When the opening 180a is closed (for example, the valve body is urged by a spring and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 180a is closed), when the valve control signal is received from the polishing control device 159, the switch is in the closed position. The valve body of the valve 179 is sucked and displaced to a position where the polishing guide port 180a is opened. As a result, the polishing guide port 180a that closes the movement of the sphere from the ball feed channel 178 to the polishing inflow guide channel 180 is opened, and the enclosed sphere in the ball feed channel 178 is lowered through the polishing guide port 180a by gravity. It moves to the polishing inflow guide path 180.
The polishing outlet switch 176 detects the sphere discharged from the upper outlet 175 as described above, and outputs a sphere discharge detection signal to the polishing control device 159 when the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 175 is detected. If the polishing controller 159 is in control of the ball polishing but cannot receive the ball discharge detection signal from the polishing outlet switch 176 for a certain period of time or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality such as a ball clogging in the polishing device 156 and is necessary. (For example, the polishing motor 170 is stopped).

In this embodiment, as described above, the polishing control device 159 exchanges signals with the effect control device 300, but inputs signals to the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200. Not. Similarly, the polishing apparatus 156 does not input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 or the payout control apparatus 200, and the polishing motor 170 of the polishing apparatus 156 only operates in response to a control signal from the polishing control apparatus 159. . That is, no information is input from the polishing control device 159 and the polishing device 156 to the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200, and the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 are unidirectionally transmitted to the polishing control device 159 and the polishing device 156. It is configured to transmit information.
Thus, the polishing control device 159 does not input any information (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, command input) to the game control device 100 (main board) or the payout control device 200. The configuration is not performed, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 100 (main substrate) or the payout control device 200. For short, it will be referred to as “subification”. Here, information is input including signal input and data input.
The game control device 100 (main board) and the payout control device 200 are devices that are directly related to the center of the game such as the progress and management of the game, whereas the effect control device 300 or the like is generally the game control device 100, for example. Since it is a device that operates passively in response to an instruction from the (main board) or the payout control device 200, it is generally referred to as a sub board.
In the present embodiment, the polishing control device 159 is simply configured to send and receive signals to and from the effect control device 300 (sub board), and also falls within the category of the sub board. In the present embodiment, for operation, the operation of the polishing control device 159 does not directly affect the game control device 100 (main board) or the payout control device 200, and the polishing control device 159 does not affect the game control device 100 ( A configuration in which no information is input to the main board) or the payout control device 200, and the encapsulated sphere is polished according to an instruction (polishing start command) from the game control device 100 (main board) or the payout control device 200. Thus, the polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156) is configured to be “sub-configured”. Therefore, the game control device 100 (main board) and the payout control device 200 are not directly affected by the polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156).

Thus, by substituting the polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156), the control burden on the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is reduced. Specifically, it is only necessary to send a polishing start command from the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200 to the effect control device 300, and when the effect control device 300 receives the polishing start command, the polishing control device 159 starts polishing. In response to the polishing instruction from the effect control device 300, the polishing control device 159 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated sphere, such as driving the polishing motor 170 and operating the switching solenoid 179S, for a predetermined period. The game ball is polished.
In this way, the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 can operate the “sub-substituted” polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156) simply by sending a polishing start command to the effect control device 300. Since the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 need only perform a simple process of sending a command to polish the encapsulated ball, the control burden on the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is remarkably reduced.
Moreover, since there is no direct influence on the game for the sub-device, there are few restrictions on the components to be mounted. That is, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed. Therefore, it is possible to design without worrying about the ROM capacity, and for example, the options for parts are expanded.
RTC (real-time clock) can be installed, and the range of production is expanded. In addition, options for parts such as sensors are widened, leading to cost reduction. Furthermore, “sub-substituting” has an advantage that the inspection is simplified because there is no direct influence on the game.
In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 are configured separately. However, a device in which such a game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 are integrated as a game control device. In this case, the game control device including the payout control device 200 is the main board. Therefore, there is a concept that the payout control apparatus 200 of the present embodiment itself is also handled as a main board and included in the main board. In accordance with this concept, even if the payout control device 200 of this embodiment is included in the main board, in this embodiment, the polishing control device 159 has a configuration in which no information is input to the payout control device 200. The control device 159 (including the polishing device 156) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, the above-mentioned merit can be exhibited.

(Power supply)
Next, the configuration of the power supply device 400 will be described.
The power supply device 400 generates DC voltages such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and supplies necessary power to the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and each electronic component shown in FIG. A power switch 481 and a RAM clear switch 112 are provided.
Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 400 in the pachinko machine 10 at normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes the game control device 100. The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus of the machine 10, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out.
In addition to the main power supply, the power supply device 400 has a RAM 111C of the game control device 100, a RAM 211C of the payout control device 200, a front frame when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (that is, when the main power supply is cut off). A backup power supply for supplying to an open switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is also provided.
Therefore, the power supply apparatus 400 has a backup power supply unit (corresponding to backup power supply means), and the backup power supply unit is configured by a large-capacitance capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200, etc., as well as to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. (Including the night monitoring switch) 64) is stored.
The power switch 481 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 400 and is used to start and stop the power supply device 400. The RAM clear switch 112 initializes the RAM 111C inside the game control device 100, the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200, and the like.

(Operation display device)
Next, details of the operation display device 7 will be described.
As described above, the operation display device 7 is connected to the effect control device 300 via the switching circuit 820 and is also connected to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B sequentially. .
FIG. 30A shows the operation display device 7.
The operation display device 7 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger, and displays a ball rental rate on the operation display device 7 as shown in FIG. A ball lending rate display 801, a remaining amount display 802 for displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card), a ball lending button 803, a return button 804, a storage / replay button 805, Message / operation area 806, switching button 8
07 is arranged.

The ball lending rate indicator 801 displays a ball lending rate when lending a game ball from the card unit 600. For example, when lending a ball at 4 yen, a display of “ball lending: 1 ball 4 yen” is displayed. To do. In addition, when lending a ball for 1 yen, the display “ball lending: 1 yen per ball” is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this example, it is possible to lend a ball at a rate of 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball.
The remaining amount indicator 802 displays the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card). At this time, the remaining amount is displayed in units of 1 yen, for example, the remaining amount “5000 yen”.
The ball lending button 803 is operated when the player desires a predetermined number of ball lending.

The return button 804 is operated when the player simply returns a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) before the game, and when the card is returned after settlement (game end) (that is, the game is finished). , Used for checkout). Therefore, in the present embodiment, no settlement button is arranged.
In the case of performing the settlement of the number of balls, this embodiment is started by operating the return button 804.
That is, when the player presses the return button 804, the card unit 600 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 200 in order to start the payment. Upon receiving the payment instruction, the payout control device 200 transmits the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) to the card unit 600, and the card unit 600 records the total number of balls held on the game card, Process to discharge. Next, when the card unit 600 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 600 notifies the payout control device 200 to that effect, and the payout control device 200 stores it (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 211C). Clear the data such as the number of holding balls, the number of counting balls, etc., the settlement ends, and the game card is returned. The card unit 600 records the total number of balls data on the game card, but the payout control device 200 stores data such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted until the game card is recorded. Therefore, the management of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is not transferred to the card unit 600.

Next, the store / replay button 805 stores a ball acquired by a player using a unique membership card called a house card, or stores a ball stored in a member card. In addition to the use of replaying, it is operated when using the number of balls that have moved to the table (which is handled in the same way as the number of stored balls).
In the message / operation area 806, a member having a membership card inputs a personal identification number or displays a business message at the time of storing / replaying a ball, displaying a number of stored balls, holding balls and counting balls It is a place to display details. In addition, the message / operation area 806 also displays the number of sphere lending.
Further, the message / operation area 806 is configured to be able to display the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls in an analog manner (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box).

Further, the message / operation area unit 806 also displays information related to effects from the effect control device 300 (game machine) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41.
Although the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 806) is arranged in the pachinko machine 10, ball rental, storage, settlement (however, recording processing to the card as described above), replay Play, return of game cards, and the like are controlled and managed by the card unit 600. On the other hand, with regard to the control and production of information regarding the production from the production control device 300 (game machine) in the operation display device 7 (including the message / operation area unit 806) and information such as characters appearing on the display device 41, production control is performed. This configuration is controlled and managed by the device 300 (game machine).

  A switch button 807 (second effect operation unit) performs an operation of switching a source of information to be displayed on the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7. The operation display device 7 is switched to the switching circuit 820 and the second card. A route for connecting to the card unit 600 sequentially through the unit connection terminal board 72B (“card unit route” as will be described later), and the operation display device 7 to the effect control device 300 (game machine) via the switching circuit 820. Operated (touched) by the player in order to switch to any one of the routes to be connected (“gaming machine route” as will be described later).

Next, a case controlled / managed by the card unit 600 will be described. For example, when a player starts a game, when a player inserts a 1000 yen banknote into the cash insertion slot 602 of the card unit 600, the amount of the inserted banknote is increased. The corresponding ball lending number is displayed in the message / operation area 806. When the player presses the ball lending button 803, ball lending addition processing is performed within the range of the displayed ball lending number, and the number of balls increased as a result of this ball lending addition processing is displayed on the ball number display 3 Is displayed. For example, when the ball lending button 803 is pressed once, ball lending is performed five times, the number of balls held is increased by 125, for example, and the number of balls held displayed on the ball holding number display 3 is also increased by 125.
In this case, the operation information indicating that the ball lending button 803 has been pressed is sent from the operation display device 7 to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B, and from the card unit 600 to the gaming machine (that is, , A game lending instruction (addition instruction to the number of balls held) is given to the game control device 100).

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the frequency range of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 601 of the card unit 600. The number of ball lending remaining on the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 806. Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 803 of the message / operation area 806, the ball lending (number of balls held) within the range of the valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card. The number of balls lent out is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3. In this case, not only the pure ball lending number is displayed on the ball holding number display 3, but the ball lending number is added to the previous number of balls, and the total number of balls is displayed on the ball holding number display. 3 is displayed. Therefore, if the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3.

  Further, when the player desires to use the stored ball within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card slot 601 of the card unit 600, and the message / operation area section When the member's PIN is entered on the screen 806, the number of stored balls remaining on the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 806. Next, when the player operates the storage / replay button 805 in the message / operation area 806, the player can use a predetermined number of stored balls (the number of held balls) within the range of the number of stored balls on the game card. Increase), and the number of used balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3 in a form in which the number of used balls from the stored ball is added to the previous number of balls.

When the game is over, the payment process is performed by touching the return button 804, and the game card in which the total number of balls is recorded is ejected from the card unit 600. Therefore, there is no settlement switch arrangement.
The player holds the ejected game card and inserts it into the card settlement machine 183 so that the card settlement machine 183 settles the payment (for example, a prize exchange receipt is ejected and can be exchanged for a prize at the hall counter).
When the break switch 812 is pressed, the game card is ejected, and the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot play. At this time, the break switch effective LED built in the break switch 812 is turned on to notify that a break is possible.

When the game ball wins, the payout control device 200 electronically increases the number of balls held by the player (that is, the number of balls held in the game value storage means by performing the ball addition process). And the like are displayed on the number-of-balls display 3.
29, the operation display device 7 described above is connected to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B, and is arranged on the operation display device 7. The operation signal of the lending button 803 is sent to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B, and the operation display device 7 receives the card via the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B and the switching circuit 820. Based on the signal output from unit 600, the remaining amount of the prepaid card is displayed.
On the other hand, the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A is a board mainly for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 10 side and the card unit 600 side. 10 is controlled so that the game ball cannot be fired.

In this example, the operation display device 7 is provided with a return button 804 for performing a game card return operation. The return button 804 is operated when the player wants to return the game card before starting the game, and is operated when the card is returned after payment (game end) as described above. As an example of the former, for example, a game card is purchased and a game card is inserted into a card unit 600 of a certain gaming machine, but the player changes his mind and moves to another table.
It should be noted that when the game is started, a control for deleting the return button 804 from the screen of the operation display device 7 may be performed.
Further, although different from the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a settlement switch is arranged, and if the settlement switch is pressed, the total number of balls is transferred to the game card, and the game card is discharged by the return button 804.

29, the operation display device 7 is connected to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820 and the second card unit connection terminal plate 72B, and the operation display device 7 is connected to the second card unit connection terminal plate. Based on the control signal output from the card unit 600 via 72B and the switching circuit 820, the message / operation area 806 is controlled to display details of the number of balls and analog display (ball box display). Control for counting the number of balls counted from the number of balls moved in accordance with the operation of the counting switch 811 under the control of the payout control device 200, and displaying analog information (ballbox display), display at the time of payment Control is also performed.
The card unit 600 outputs control signals necessary for display on the operation display device 7, ball lending, storage and the like to the operation display device 7, and the operation display device 7 performs various displays based on the control signals from the card unit 600. It responds to the screen configuration necessary for ball lending, storage, etc., and the operation of various buttons.
Here, the card unit 600 constitutes game value management means, return operation means, settlement means, switching control means, and display mode change control means. The operation display device 7 constitutes a second display device managed by the card unit, and constitutes a second game value display means for displaying a player's game value by the management of the card unit 600, and further includes a second game value display means. The production operation unit is configured. The operation display device 7 constitutes a third display device that manages the card unit 600 that can display the number of balls and details of the counting balls.
The counting switch 811 constitutes a counting operation means capable of operating the counting means by a player's operation. The return button 804 constitutes a return operation means capable of operating the operation of returning the game value storage medium from the card unit by the player's operation.

(Switching circuit)
Next, the detailed configuration of the switching circuit 820 (switching means) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 30B is a block configuration diagram of the switching circuit 820. 30B, the switching circuit 820 includes an input / output interface 821, a determination circuit 822, a display switching circuit 823,
A touch information switching circuit 824 is provided. Since the description is complicated in FIG. 30B, the flow of data, information, and signals is described without illustration of the second card unit connection terminal board 72B.
The input / output interface 821 is an interface circuit that performs input / output processing of data (for example, display data), information, and signals. The determination circuit 822 determines whether or not there is a priority signal from the gaming machine, and if there is a priority signal, the operation display device 7 is transmitted to and received from the gaming machine so that information from the gaming machine is displayed on the operation display device 7. It is determined to switch to the route, and this is transmitted to the display switching circuit 823. Here, the gaming machine refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the production control device 300 (hereinafter the same).
In the normal mode (initial state), data and information from the card unit 600 are output to the operation display device 7, and information (for example, touch information) from the operation display device 7 is output to the card unit 600. The determination circuit 822 and the display switching circuit 823 operate according to the normal mode.

The display switching circuit 823 switches between sending data and information from the gaming machine to the operation display device 7 or sending data and information from the card unit 600 to the operation display device 7 in accordance with an instruction from the determination circuit 822 to display the operation display device 7. Switching control is performed. As described above, in the normal mode (initial state), the display switching circuit 823 switches the display route to the transmission / reception route of outputting data, information, and the like from the card unit 600 to the operation display device 7.
The touch information switching circuit 824 switches the connection route of the operation display device 7 to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 600 or the gaming machine according to the operation state of various buttons of the touch panel type of the operation display device 7. For example, when the player touches the switching button 807 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 820 accordingly, and the internal touch information switching circuit 824 is switched by the switching circuit 820. Based on the above, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched to the transmission / reception route of either the card unit 600 or the gaming machine. In this case, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed and switched to another connection route. For example, if the operation display device 7 has been connected to the card unit 600 until now, when the switching information is generated by touching the switch button 807, the operation display device 7 is connected to the gaming machine. It will switch to the root.

Here, since the connection route of the operation display device 7 will be complicated if it is explained in detail every time, it is defined so that it can be expressed as follows.
(A) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Card Unit 600 This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to card unit 600 through switching circuit 820 and second card unit connection terminal plate 72B in this order.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “card unit route”.
(B) Route for Connecting Operation Display Device 7 to Game Machine This route is a route for connecting operation display device 7 to effect control device 300 (game machine) via switching circuit 820.
Hereinafter, this route is referred to as a “gaming machine route”.

Next, the overall flow of data, information, and signals including the switching circuit 820 will be described as follows. In FIG. 30B, typical data and signal flows are indicated by arrows.
First, in the normal mode (initial state), display data, information, and the like from the card unit 600 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820, and touch information and switching information are switched from the operation display device 7. The touch information is output to the card unit 600 from the switching circuit 820. In this normal mode, information output from the card unit 600 is displayed in the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7. Further, when the player touches various buttons of the operation display device 7 except the switching button 807, the touch information is output to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820, and the card unit 600 responds to the touch information. Take control.

Next, when the player touches the switching button 807 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 820 accordingly, and the internal touch information switching circuit 824 switches in the switching circuit 820. Based on the information, the connection route of the operation display device 7 is switched from the card unit 600 to the transmission / reception route (that is, the gaming machine route) of the gaming machine. As a result, the previous connection route (that is, the previous route) is changed to switch to another connection route. In this case, the card unit route is switched to the gaming machine route.
When switching to the gaming machine route, display data is output from the effect control device 300 to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820, and the operation display device 7 outputs to the message / operation area 806 from the effect control device 300. Information to be displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons on the operation display device 7 excluding the switch button 807, the touch information is output to the effect control device 300 via the switch circuit 820, and the effect control device 300 uses the touch information as touch information. Perform the appropriate control.
On the other hand, display data is output from the production control device 300 to the display device 41, and the display device 41 performs display for production based on the display data from the production control device 300.

In addition, a priority signal is output from the effect control device 300 to the switching circuit 820, and the priority signal is output when switching preferentially to the gaming machine route during a required effect or the like. However, even when gaming machines are prioritized (when priority signals are output and switching to gaming machine routes preferentially), when switching information (for example, touch information) occurs, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) ) And the operation display device 7 transmits / receives data to / from the card unit 600.
It should be noted that the operation display for ball rental based on information from the card unit 600 and the operation display for presentation of the gaming machine based on information from the gaming machine are performed by the same operation display device 7, but the card unit is switched by the switching circuit 820. 600 and information of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) are not mixed. Here, the gaming machine refers to a circuit on the gaming machine side, for example, the effect control device 300. Further, the card unit 600 and the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) are not connected via the switching circuit 820. Furthermore, although the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) is connected to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820, input / output of signals, information, etc. between the gaming machine and the operation display device 7 is limited to production only. Is done.

(Switch power supply delay circuit)
Next, a detailed configuration of the switch power supply delay circuit 941 (indicated as SW power supply delay circuit in FIG. 31) will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 31, a switch power supply delay circuit 941 is provided inside the payout control apparatus 200, and the switch power supply delay circuit 941 includes a crystal oscillator 942, a counter 943, a shift register 944, and a relay 945.
The crystal oscillator 942 generates an oscillation signal having a predetermined period (predetermined frequency), and the counter 943 divides the oscillation signal of the predetermined frequency generated by the crystal oscillator 942 into a moderately low frequency with a certain ease of use by clock division. This is input to the shift register 944. The shift register 944 is configured to function as a delay circuit.

The main power supplied from the power supply device 400 to the payout control device 200 is input to the shift register 944 as input data (5V power main power) inside the payout control device 200, and the shift register 944 receives the counter 943. Output signal (a signal with a constant low frequency divided by the clock) is used as a shift pulse, and the input data (main power source of the 5V power supply) is shifted (delayed) for a certain period of time to operate. . Here, the shift register 944 delays input data (main power source of 5 V power source) for, for example, 5 seconds, and outputs it to the relay 945 as a signal for on / off control. Specifically, the shift register 944 delays the input data (the main power source of the 5V power supply) for 5 seconds, and outputs the off control signal to the relay 945 during the delay, and the on control signal is relayed to the relay 945 after 5 seconds. Output to.
The main power source of 5V power is applied to the relay 945, and the relay 945 is normally off (while the off control signal is input), but when the on control signal is input from the shift register 944, The main power of 5V power supply is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 by turning on.

Although main power can be supplied from the payout control device 200 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64, the main power is supplied via the switch power supply delay circuit 941 as described above. Supply of main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is started after a delay of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of main power supply to the control device 200. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
On the other hand, when the main power is cut off, such as at a game shop at night, the backup power (5 VBB) from the power supply device 400 is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 via the payout control device 200. The frame opening information of the front frame 12 is held. The backup power supply (5VBB) does not pass through the switch power supply delay circuit 941, but is always supplied from the power supply apparatus 400 to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 through the payout control apparatus 200. ing.
Further, an output signal of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 (frame opening information of the front frame 12: that is, abnormality detection information) is output to the dispensing control device 200, and the dispensing control device 200 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 12. Is received by the internal input port 946 and output to the CPU 211A. The CPU 211A stores the frame opening information of the front frame 12 in the RAM 211C and then transmits it to the card unit 600.

As described above, the switch power supply delay circuit 941 inputs the 5V power supply serving as the main power supply of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 to the shift register 944 at a constant clock, and the shift register 944 outputs a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Just do a delay. Since the relay 945 is turned on by a 5 V on control signal output from the shift register 944 that starts up after being delayed by a predetermined time, the 5 V of the main power supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is also The start of supply of the main power to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is delayed later than the CPU 211A and various ICs on the payout control device 200. Therefore, the timing at which the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside is also greater than the start of the supply of the main power to the dispensing control device 200. Become slow.
The backup power is always supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. The backup power is the same as that supplied to the RAM 211C of the payout control apparatus 200, and the RAM 211C is also backed up in the same manner.
Here, the switch power supply delay circuit 941 constitutes a delay means.

It should be noted that the switch power supply delay circuit 941 is realized by delay means using, for example, a simple CR circuit (delay by CR time constant) without using the above-described components such as the crystal oscillator 942, the counter 943, the shift register 944, and the relay 945. May be.
However, the delay due to the CR time constant has an advantage that the cost can be reduced, but it is also possible that the error is large. Therefore, in this embodiment, the switch power supply delay circuit 941 is realized by a delay circuit using a logic IC, for example. ing.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame opening information of the front frame 12 from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is abnormality detection information, and therefore, it is taken in with an accurate delay and output to an external device with an accurate delay time. There are advantages that can be made.
The relay 945 may be a mechanical relay, but is not limited thereto, and may be, for example, a photo relay or other switching means.

(Batch display device)
Next, a detailed configuration of the collective display device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 32A is an enlarged view of the batch display device 50. In FIG. 32A, the collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display 51, a special figure 2 display 52, a special figure 1 hold LED 54, a special figure 2 hold LED 55, a winning display LED 355, a common figure LED 53, and a universal figure hold LED 56. The round display LED 60 and the status display LED 58 are provided, and these elements are integrally formed on the substrate of the collective display device 50.
The special figure 1 indicator 51 is made up of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being fluctuated”, etc., for Special Figure 1.
Similarly, the special figure 2 indicator 52 is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 2 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being changed”, etc., for the special figure 2.

  Note that, as described above, the variable display game according to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is that when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 36 and a special figure start winning (first start winning) occurs, When the first variation display game by the variation display of the decoration special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 and the game ball enters the second start prize opening 37, a special figure start prize (second start prize) occurs. The display device 41 performs the second variation display game based on the variation display of the decoration special figure 2, but displays the aspects of the variable display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 instead of the decoration special figure. These are the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 arranged in the collective display device 50.

The special figure 1 hold LED 54 displays the number of the special figure 1 held. The special figure 1 hold number indicates that the game ball enters the first start winning opening 36 and receives a special figure start prize (first start prize). ) Is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
Similarly, the special figure 2 holding LED 55 displays the number of holdings of the special figure 2, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the special figure starting prize (first figure) when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 37. This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a (2 start winning) occurs.
As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the special figure 1 hold LED 54 and the special figure 2 hold LED 55 are configured to display 1 to 4 hold numbers with three LEDs in this example for common use. Yes. That is, as shown in FIG. 32C, 1 to 4 hold numbers are displayed in the following manner.
-Hold number = 1: One LED at the left end is lit-Hold number = 2: One second LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 3: One third LED from the left end is lit-Hold number = 4 : All three LEDs are lit. Note that the LEDs may not be lit but may be blinking.

The winning display LED 355 displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening, and corresponds to a winning display device. Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of possessed balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 36, 37, the large winning opening 38d and the general winning opening 35 of the variable winning apparatus 38.
In the case of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, so that a winning ball corresponding to winning in a winning opening is added to the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is actually discharged (paid out) to the upper plate.

The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is as follows.
・ Large winning opening 38d = 13 ・ Starting winning opening 36 = 3 ・ Starting winning opening 37 (Fuden) = 1 ・ General winning opening 35 = 10 Winning indication LED355 consists of two 7-segment LEDs, 2 digits Can be displayed as the number of prize balls. The display time of the number of prize balls is as follows.
-Normal mode (normal gaming state) = 1 second (s)
(Small hits and medium hits are included in the normal mode)
・ Special mode (big hit, probability fluctuation, short time (under normal power support) = 0.5 seconds (s)
Note that the special mode is a concept indicating a state where there is a high possibility that a game ball will win continuously, such as during a big hit.

The general-purpose LED 53 is a single LED, and performs normal-state display (including change display, stop state display, and the like). As the display mode, for example, “out of contact” stop = light-off, “hit” stop = light on, “during change” = blinking.
The multi-purpose hold LED 56 displays the number of general-purpose holds. The number of general-purpose holds is determined when the multi-display LED 53 of the collective display device 50 is activated when a game ball passes the general-purpose start gate 34. A general-purpose state display is performed, and at the same time, a general-purpose variation display game is performed on the display unit 41a as a decorative general-state state display. In this way, the game ball passes through the general-purpose start gate 34. In this case, it is the number of holds stored with an upper limit of four.
As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the ordinary map hold LED 56 is similar to the above-described special map 1 hold LED 54 and special map 2 hold LED 55, as shown in FIG. It has a structure that can display the number of holds on the map. In addition, the display mode of the usual number of holds is the same as the example of FIG. 32C, and detailed description is omitted.

The round display LED 60 displays the number of rounds when a big hit is generated in accordance with the start winning of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 and the big hit game is executed. As shown in FIG. For this reason, in this example, four types of rounds can be displayed with four LEDs.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32B, three types of rounds are displayed in the following manner. • ○ + (2) = 2 rounds displayed • ○ + (11) = 11 rounds displayed • ○ + (16) = 16 rounds displayed In the above, ○ indicates lighting of one LED. Also, (2), (11), and (16) are the stickers on which the numbers (2), (11), and (16) are drawn on the surface of the main body of the batch display device 50 on the front side of the LEDs. In addition, the display corresponding to the number of rounds is performed by three LEDs. For example, a sheet may be used instead of the seal.

As a result, if the LED corresponding to the sticker (2) is lit, it is easily understood that there are two rounds. Similarly, if the LED corresponding to the seal (11) is lit, it is known that the round is 11 rounds, and if the LED corresponding to the seal (16) is lit, it is understood that the round is 16 rounds. Become.
When two rounds of display are performed, one LED corresponding to “◯” and two LEDs corresponding to the seal (2) are lit simultaneously. This is the same when displaying 11 rounds and 16 rounds, and one LED corresponding to ○ is turned on together. Also, in other round games, only one LED corresponding to ○ is lit. Each LED may be blinking instead of lighting.
Note that the round display LED 60 has four LEDs, one of which does not correspond to the seal, but the LED may be used as a spare. That is, when the number of rounds is four, four types of rounds can be expressed by lighting the four LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds.

Also, sticking the numbers (2), (11), and (16) on the main body surface of the collective display device 50 on the front side of the LED is because of the difference in the model of the pachinko machine 10 Since the number may change, it is possible to change to the difference in the number of rounds, etc., as long as the seal is changed, so that such a flexible response is possible.
In addition, the performance indication of the model is also written on the seal. The performance display includes, for example, model name, jackpot probability (including a high probability at the time of probability change and a low probability at the normal time), a probability change ratio, the maximum number of jackpots (the limit value of the number of jackpots), the number of winning balls, and the like. The performance display by the sticker may be described in a place different from the collective display device 50 (that is, the sticker may be pasted in another place).
The state display LED 58 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and is constituted by two LEDs. As the display of the gaming state, for example, “probability variation state” and “time saving state” are displayed by lighting (or blinking) each one LED.

F. Outline of Game Next, an outline of the game performed in the pachinko machine 10 of this example and the flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, On the display unit 41a of the display device 41, a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed.
Then, when the player inserts, for example, a game card into the card unit 600 and performs a lending operation with a predetermined unit frequency (for example, pressing the ball lending button 803 of the operation display device 7 once), a predetermined number of balls (For example, 125) are added and displayed on the ball holding number display 3 of the lower panel 6. At this time, the ball lending number data (valuable value information) of the game card is reduced by the predetermined number (for example, five degrees corresponding to 500 yen). Note that the number of balls possessed corresponds to the game value that is the profit of the player as described above, and the data on the number of balls possessed is stored in, for example, the RAM 211C (game value storage means) in the payout control device 200.

Then, when the player operates the firing operation handle 24 with the above-mentioned number of possessed balls, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 32 via the guide rail 31, and the game ball that has been put in is special. When winning in the start winning opening 36 or 37 in the figure (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning), the collective display device 50 displays the variation of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 and also displays the decorative special drawing. A command for instructing a variable display is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (for example, scrolling) is displayed on the display unit 41a in which a decorative special figure (consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) changes (for example, scrolls). A so-called fluctuation display game is performed, and a special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game) is performed. On the other hand, the sphere that has been removed without winning the prize flows into the out-sphere inlet 30a.
The ball that has fallen through the game area 32 becomes out or safe, and after passing through the game area 32, it flows down to the game ball inlet 171 of the circulation device 155, is collected and circulated by this circulation device 155, and is again guided to the launch position. Will be. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

This inventive concept is shown as follows.
A predetermined number of game balls can be encapsulated in the gaming machine main body, and the enclosed game balls can be launched into the game area to play a game, and the game balls launched into the game area Control means for increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result, and by collecting the game balls that have passed through the game area and guiding them to the launch position, the enclosed game balls can be recycled and used. It is a concept of an enclosed ball type gaming machine that performs a game.

Here, increasing the game value, which is the player's profit, according to the game result of the game ball fired in the game area, in other words, whether the game result is in a predetermined profit state or other state? In the case of a predetermined profit state, the player's profit (game value) is increased in correspondence with the predetermined number of prize balls. For example, the game ball becomes safe or out If it is determined that it is safe, for example, the number of balls held by the player is increased. “Safe” corresponds to a ball entering a winning opening (including the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning openings 36, 37, etc.).
In addition, the game value (for example, the number of possessed balls) that is the profit of the player according to the game result is increased. Including special cases where a special game condition) occurs and the big prize opening is opened, and a lot of prize balls are added to the number of possessed balls by winning a game ball in the big prize opening. This is equivalent to increasing the game value. Note that the gaming value that is the profit of the player is not necessarily limited to the number of balls corresponding to the number of game balls, and the number of points may be used instead of the number of balls held. However, in this example, unless otherwise indicated, the embodiment uses a number of balls that corresponds to the number of game balls as the game value.
Further, the game value (the number of possessed balls or the number of points) is added according to the game result as described above, while being subtracted by the number of game balls fired. For example, when the number of possessed balls corresponding to the number of game balls is used as the game value, the number of possessed balls is decremented by “1” every time the game ball is launched.

And, if the stop result mode of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game (a combination of special figures derived by the fluctuation display) is a special result aspect (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), it is a big hit. A privilege to be called is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the big hit and after the big hit game (a special prize described later) After the period), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, the above-described time-short state control is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 38 is set for a specified time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this jackpot state, a command for instructing display of a jackpot screen for directing the jackpot state or informing the player of the number of rounds of jackpot is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 for display. In the unit 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called abruptness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

Further, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 36 or 37 during the special figure change display game or the big hit, the special section start memory is displayed on the display unit 41a or the like, for example, up to four. After the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit state is stored, the special figure fluctuation display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a start and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a start and no start memory is stored. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display), and two types of special figure variable display games are displayed. A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 36 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 during any of the special figure change display games, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.

When a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 37 is generated, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37 during any of the special figure variation display games, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends. When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 37 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed), or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes the usual figure start gate 34 during the game, the above-mentioned usual figure fluctuation display game is performed. Since this ordinary map display game has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning port (including the general winning port 35 and the starting winning ports 36, 37, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, for example, within a range in which the big winning opening 38d of the variable winning device 38 does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), for example, temporarily for a period up to ten winnings. The jackpot round to be released is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds, and the player will win a large number of winnings.
In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 355 in the collective display device 50. The winning here is all winnings with winning ball discharge (actually paying out balls or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 37, the large winning opening 38d of the variable winning apparatus 38, and the general winning opening 35. Regardless of which winning ball is won in any of these winning holes, a predetermined time is displayed by a winning display LED 355 consisting of two 7-segment balls (the normal mode is 1 second and the special mode is 0.5 seconds). Therefore, the player can easily know where on the board (the game board 30) and how many winning balls are obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

Further, the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) is a number-of-balls display 3 (game value display means) for displaying the number of balls possessed by the player (game value) under the management of the payout control device 200 (game machine side). ) And the message / operation area unit 806 (second game value display means) of the operation display device 7 that displays the number of players' balls (game value) under the management of the card unit 600. .
In this case, various information (various information including the number of balls) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) is sent periodically (for example, every 400 ms) from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600. In the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 600, the player's number of balls (game value) can be displayed.
The number of balls held by the player is always digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 3. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number of balls. However, since the number-of-balls display 3 is small, it is not easy to intuitively grasp the number of balls when the number of balls is increased.

  On the other hand, the message / operation area portion 806 of the operation display device 7 is a liquid crystal display larger than the number of balls held display 3, and the number of balls held in the message / operation area portion 806 is displayed in an analog form in the form of a ball box. . For example, if the number of balls held by the player increases as the big hits continue, the figure that looks like a ball box is displayed as an analog such as two boxes, three boxes,. As a result, when the player has a large number of balls, the number of balls held in the message / operation area 806 is displayed in an analogy with a shape like a ball box, so that the intuitive understanding of the number of balls can be performed smoothly. Can be done.

Next, if the player wants to count the number of balls to be counted, that is, in the case of a game machine with a method of paying out with real balls, the acquired number of balls is outside the gaming machine. If you want to do the same thing electronically as the work of physically moving to the ball box, you can do it as follows.
When the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3, when the count switch 811 disposed on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed to sequentially count the number of balls, the number of balls is counted. The counted number of possessed balls becomes the counted number of balls, and is held and managed by the payout control device 200. However, the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are periodically sent from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600 (for example, every 400 ms), whereby the operation display device 7 under the management of the card unit 600 On the screen of the message / operation area unit 806, a digital display (numerals) of the number of counting balls and an analog display (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) are displayed.
Similarly, the player's number of balls displayed on the number-of-balls display 3 is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7 in an analog manner (analog with a figure that looks like a ball box). Display) or an explanation of the number of balls held.
Further, the data on the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are also sent from the payout control device 200 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100, and the upper part of the decorative ball display device 270 is controlled by the effect control device 300. Since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls is performed using a large number of LEDs of the decorative ball display device 270a and the lower decorative ball display device 270b, the number of held balls and the number of counted balls are particularly demonstrated while exhibiting decorativeness. The player can easily grasp it.

By seeing the digital display (numerical) or analog display (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box) on the screen of the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7, the player has how much It is easy to see if the number of balls has moved to the number of balls counted. That is, in an example of a gaming machine that pays out with a real ball, it is the same as knowing how much the acquired number of possessed balls is physically transferred to a ball box outside the gaming machine.
In this way, if the counting switch 811 is pressed to count the number of balls, the counted number of balls is held and managed by the dispensing control device 200 as the counted number of balls, but from the dispensing control device 200 to the card unit 600. On the other hand, the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are regularly (for example, 400
Therefore, “Count”, “End Game”, and “Continue Game” buttons appear on the screen of the message / operation area 806 under the control of the card unit 600. If you touch, the message “Please press the return button” will appear, prompting you to settle. After that, if you press the return button 804, the total number of balls (number of balls + number of balls) will be displayed on the game card. After being written (recorded), the settlement is completed and the game card is returned.

On the other hand, when the “continue game” button is touched, a message “start firing” appears, prompting the launch, and then the launch operation handle 24 can be operated to continue the game.
Further, when replay is desired using the number of counting balls, by operating the counting ball use switch 814, for example, 100 moves to the number of possessed balls per operation, and can be fired.
In this way, even when a game is played with an enclosed ball type gaming machine, the player can count the number of possessed balls without a sense of incongruity with a feeling close to transferring the acquired game balls to the ball box. Then, the counted number of balls counted from the number of held balls is held, and thereafter, settlement or replay can be easily performed.

Next, the following display control is performed on the screen of the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7.
Normally (initial state) is a route (card unit route) for connecting the operation display device 7 to the card unit 600, and data is transmitted and received between the operation display device 7 and the card unit 600. As a result, display data, information, and the like from the card unit 600 are output to the operation display device 7 via the switching circuit 820, and information output from the card unit 600 is displayed in the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7. Is displayed. Further, when the player touches various buttons of the operation display device 7 except the switching button 807, the touch information is output to the card unit 600 via the switching circuit 820, and the card unit 600 responds to the touch information. Take control. In this way, under the management and control of the card unit 600, processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement (recording processing to the card), replay, game card return, etc. is performed, and ball rental, storage, Information necessary for payment, replay, game card return, and the like are displayed on the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7.

On the other hand, when a priority signal is output from the production control device 300 to the switching circuit 820 when necessary during the production (for example, a battle mode when a reach occurs), the switching circuit 820 changes the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Based on the display data from the production control device 300, the information related to the production is preferentially displayed on the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7 based on the display data from the production control device 300.
Specifically, when the priority signal is output, for example, in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach, one of a plurality of items used by the character in the battle mode is displayed to the player in the message / operation area unit 806. In this case, a screen to be selected is displayed, and an effect is displayed so that the player can select it with a touch button on the screen. In some cases, the player may select a favorite song during a big hit.
Even when the priority signal is output to the switching circuit 820, when the player touches the switching button 807 of the operation display device 7, the switching information is changed from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 820 accordingly. In the switching circuit 820, the internal touch information switching circuit 824 operates based on the switching information to switch the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the gaming machine route to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Thereby, processing based on the control of the card unit 600 (for example, ball rental in the middle of a game) is performed.

Further, when the operation display device 7 is in the card unit route in the normal mode, and processing such as ball rental, storage, settlement, and replay is possible under the control of the card unit 600,
When the player touches the switching button 807 of the operation display device 7, switching information is output from the operation display device 7 to the switching circuit 820 accordingly, and the internal touch information switching circuit 824 is based on the switching information in the switching circuit 820. It operates to switch the connection route of the operation display device 7 from the card unit route to the gaming machine route. Thereby, processing based on the control of the effect control device 300 on the gaming machine side is performed. Specifically, based on display data from the effect control device 300, the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7 displays, for example, a model name, a description of the game, and the like.

As described above, the operation display device 7 is normally a card unit route. Under the management and control of the card unit 600, ball rental, storage, settlement (recording processing to a card), replay, return of a game card, etc. The necessary information is displayed in the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7, but it is given priority when it is necessary during production (for example, battle mode when reach occurs). Based on the signal, the card unit route is preferentially switched to the gaming machine route, and information related to the effect is preferentially displayed in the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7.
However, even when the priority signal is generated, if the player touches the switch button 807, the game machine route is switched to the card unit route for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), for example, ball rental or replay during the game. Is possible.
Therefore, the operation display device can display information related to the production (for example, information on item selection, model name, game description, etc. in the battle mode with the occurrence of reach) without hindering ball rental or replay. 7 can be displayed on the message / operation area portion 806, and can be easily understood by the player, and various effects can be performed.

In the present embodiment, a front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is provided, and the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 12 is opened. In this configuration, the information that the opening of the frame 12 is detected is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.
Therefore, in particular, when the front frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened at night when the game hall is closed, information (for example, open ON data) that detects that the front frame 12 is opened is displayed at night. Also holds. It should be noted that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 can detect both the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the state in which the front frame 12 is not opened. The detection signal of the night monitoring switch 64 is referred to as frame opening information.

  Next, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power) the next morning, the frame opening information detected when the front frame 12 is opened at night is obtained from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. When the payout control device 200 reads the output signal, the payout control device 200 takes in the output signal. However, the payout control device 200 prepares for start-up from the time the main power is turned on (for example, prohibition of all interrupts, CPU It takes a certain amount of time to initialize peripheral circuits (including serial ports). When the frame opening information is input from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 to the payout control device 200 during the start-up preparation period, the frame opening information may not be captured.

Therefore, when the main power supplied from the power supply device 400 is turned on, the main power is immediately supplied to the dispensing control device 200. However, the main power supply is predetermined for the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. A switch power supply delay circuit 941 for delaying by a time (for example, 5 seconds) is provided, and the main power supply is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power supply to the dispensing control device 200 is turned on. Supplied. The front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored when the main power supply is cut off to the outside after the supply of the main power supply is started.
Thereby, after the start-up preparation period in the payout control device 200 elapses, the frame open information of the front frame open switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is output to the outside and input to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device. Then, the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored in the RAM 211C is transmitted to the card unit 600.
Therefore, since the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is captured by the dispensing control device 200 after the start-up preparation period of the dispensing control device 200 elapses, the frame opening information may not be captured. The frame opening information can be surely captured and security against fraud is improved.

On the other hand, when the store clerk of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 112 to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 111C in the game control device 100, the RAM 211C in the payout control device 200, etc. are initialized. Will be converted.
In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 112 is turned on, the RAM 211C in the payout control device 200 is initialized and cleared, and then the frame of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is set. The release information is taken into the payout control device 200 and stored in the RAM 211C. Thereafter, the frame opening information stored in the RAM 211C is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600. Therefore, there is no problem that the frame opening information of the RAM 211C is erased by turning on the RAM clear switch 112.
The information stored in the RAM 211C is cleared only because the information before the frame opening information of the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is taken into the payout control device 200 is used.
When the payout control device 200 receives a frame release information reception notification from the card unit 600, it sends a frame release information transmission normal command to the game control device 100.

In addition, in the payout control device 200, when the frame opening information of the front frame 12 is not transmitted to the card unit 600 (for example, when reception of the frame opening information is not received from the card unit 600), the frame opening information is transmitted. An error flag is set, and a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted to the game control device 100. When the frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, the game control device 100 transmits a frame opening information transmission error command to the effect control board (effect control device 300). Thereby, in the production control device 300, based on the frame opening information transmission error command, for example, an error message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information is not transmitted to the card unit 600 is displayed on the display device 41. Notify the store clerk.
It should be noted that an error signal may be output from the payout control device 200 to the error display LED 250 so that the error display LED 250 is turned on (or flashes).
On the other hand, in the payout control apparatus 200, when the frame opening information of the front frame 12 is transmitted to the card unit 600 (for example, when the reception notification of the frame opening information is received from the card unit 600), the frame opening information transmission normal command Is transmitted to the game control device 100. When the frame opening information transmission normal command is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, the game control device 100 transmits a frame opening information transmission normal command to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
The production control device 300 controls the display device 41 to display a message indicating that a command related to the frame opening information has been transmitted to the card unit 600 based on the frame opening information transmission normal command, and notifies the store clerk. May be.

Thus, at the night when the amusement hall is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the front frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64, the open state of the front frame 12 is detected, and the open information is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.
The next morning, when the main power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main power is supplied to the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 after a predetermined time delay from turning on the main power to the payout control device 200. After the delay time elapses, the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 outputs the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored when the main power supply is shut off to the outside. Next, when the payout control device 200 reads the detection signal (frame opening information) from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64, it is stored in the RAM 211C, and the frame opening information of the front frame 12 stored in the RAM 211C is stored in the card unit. For example, the card unit 600 notifies the error, or outputs error information to the hall computer 186 (further, it may be possible not to lend the ball). Further, when the front frame 12 is illegally opened and frame opening information is generated, the error state is displayed on the display device 41.
Therefore, when the store clerk looks at the error notification of the display device 41 or the card unit 600, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure for the attachment of the illegal board or the like (for example, removal of the illegal board or the like and normal inspection) ) And security against fraud can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156) is not limited to the game control device 100 (main board) even when the pachinko machine 10 is in operation and the store is closed and the power is turned off. ) And information input (for example, input of information such as signal input, data input, and command input) is not performed to the payout control apparatus 200. That is, the polishing control device 159 (including the polishing device 156) is “sub-configured”. Therefore, by substituting it, there is a merit that the limitation of ROM capacity and the limitation of parts are relaxed.
Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the polishing apparatus 156 is operated with a predetermined period when the power is turned on as a polishing period, and the game ball is polished. While the game ball is being polished, the ball is stopped from firing and the game cannot be played.
Specifically, the payout control device 200 transmits a polishing start command to the game control device 100 at the start of polishing when the power is turned on, and when the game control device 100 receives the polishing start command from the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300 Send a polishing start command. When the production control device 300 receives the polishing start command from the game control device 100, it instructs the polishing control device 159 to start polishing, and displays on the screen of the display device 41 from receiving the polishing start command to receiving the polishing stop command. Control to do.
In response to a polishing instruction from the production control device 300, the polishing control device 159 executes processing necessary for polishing the encapsulated ball, such as driving the polishing motor 170 and operating the switching solenoid 179S, for a predetermined period of time. Polishing is performed.
In the polishing process, the polishing motor 170 of the polishing apparatus 156 is turned on and started by the control of the polishing control apparatus 159, and the switching solenoid 179S of the switching valve 179 slides a part of the ball feed flow path 178 to polish the polishing guide port. 180a is opened, and the encapsulated spheres existing in the sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178 are moved by gravity to the lower polishing inflow guide path 180 through the polishing guide opening 180a, and the polishing device 156 is passed through the polishing inflow guide path 180. Lead to. Such an operation (ie, displacement: slide) of the switching solenoid 179S is referred to as switching the path of the enclosing sphere to the “polishing side”. That is, in this case, the encapsulated sphere circulates through the polishing apparatus 156 and becomes a route for polishing.
On the other hand, an operation in which the switching solenoid 179S closes the polishing guide port 180a without sliding a part of the ball feed channel 178 is referred to as switching the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “normal side”. That is, in this case, the enclosed ball does not circulate through the polishing device 156, passes through the game board 30 and flows into the circulation device 155, and the ball feed for firing the ball through the sensor flow path 177 and the ball feed flow path 178. The ball sent to the device and sent to the launch position is launched toward the game area 32 along the guide rail 31 by the launch solenoid 773 of the launch device, and becomes an out ball (including a safe ball) or a foul ball again. It becomes a normal encapsulated ball circulation route in which the route of flowing in from the game ball inlet 171 as a collection ball is repeatedly circulated.

When the switching solenoid 179S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to the “polishing side”, the encapsulated sphere starts to flow into the polishing apparatus 156, and the inflowed sphere is lifted by the lifting screw 173 by the power of the polishing motor 170, And is discharged from the upper outlet 175 via the polishing outlet switch 176 and flows into the sensor flow path 177 again. Thereafter, during ball polishing, the encapsulated sphere is guided again to the polishing device 156 through the path of the sensor flow path 177, the ball feed flow path 178, the polishing guide port 180a, and the polishing inflow guide path 180, and polishing is repeatedly performed. .
If the polishing outlet switch 176 does not detect the discharge of the sphere from the upper outlet 175 for a certain time or more, it is determined that the polishing apparatus 156 is abnormal such as a clogged ball, and the polishing motor 170 of the polishing apparatus 156 is prevented from continuing to rotate. .
Next, after the switching solenoid 179S switches the path of the encapsulated sphere to “polishing side”, when a predetermined time T1 elapses, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to “normal side”. Thereafter, when the predetermined time T2 further elapses and the predetermined time T3 elapses after the polishing outlet switch 176 is turned on, the driving of the polishing motor 170 is stopped. Further, when the production control device 300 receives the polishing stop command, the display device 41 stops the display of the sphere displayed on the screen during polishing.
When driving of the polishing motor 170 is stopped, the polishing motor 170 does not consume power. Further, when the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “normal side”, the switching solenoid 179S closes the polishing guide port 180a by the valve body of the switching valve 179 (for example, the valve body is urged by a spring to polish the polishing guide port). In this state, the switching solenoid 179S does not consume power.
Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the path of the encapsulated sphere is switched to the “polishing side” for a predetermined time T1, and the encapsulated sphere is polished by the polishing apparatus 156. Next, when the polishing of the encapsulated sphere is completed, the game is ready, and the encapsulated sphere is circulated without going through the polishing device 156 during the game.
Further, the game control device 100 (main board) and the payout control device 200 simply issue a polishing start command and a polishing stop command to the effect control device 300, and under the control of the effect control device 300, the polishing control device 159 (polishing device). 156 is also controlled), the control burden on the game control device 100 (main board) and the payout control device 200 can be reduced, and the efficiency is improved.

Further, when the number of balls held is generated during the game of the pachinko machine 10, the decoration with the large number of LEDs of the upper decorative ball display device 270a and the lower decorative ball display device 270b in the decorative ball display device 270 is performed.
For example, in the upper decorative ball display device 270a, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all LEDs are lit or blinking, and when the number of balls is 50 or less, half of all LEDs The decoration is controlled so that is turned off.
Further, in the lower decorative ball display device 270b, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and while counting the number of balls, the lower decorative ball holding device 270a is imaged from the upper decorative ball display device 270a. The decoration is controlled so that the LED (that is, the LED of the counting decoration unit 270c) is moved and blinked so that the sphere moves toward the sphere display device 270b. Then, in accordance with the number of counted balls, the LED is turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device 270b in the image of the ball box, and the decoration control is performed so that the player can know the approximate number of counted balls by the number of LEDs turned on. Done.
In this way, since the decoration of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls is performed using a large number of LEDs in the decoration holding ball display device 270, the expression of the number of balls held and the number of counting balls close to a real ball is given to the player. can do. Therefore, the player can easily understand the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.

Further, when the number of balls held during the game of the pachinko machine 10 is generated, the number of balls held by the player is displayed on the number-of-balls display 3, but at this time, it is arranged on the lower panel 6 of the pachinko machine 10 When the counting switch 811 is pressed, as described above, the number of balls held is counted and becomes the number of counted balls, which is displayed on the message / operation area 806 of the operation display device 7 (for example, digital display of the number of counted balls) (Numerical value)) and analog display (analog display with a figure that looks like a ball box). When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball display 813 is lit to notify.
In this state, when the player wants to return from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls, the player uses the counting ball use switch 814. That is, when the player desires to move the ball from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls, the counting ball use switch 814 is operated. When the number of counting balls is present, the counting ball indicator 813 is lit, so that the player can know. In addition, the counting ball use switch LED built in the counting ball use switch 814 is lit when the ball can move from the counting ball number to the holding ball number, so that the player also has the counting ball number. I understand that. Note that the case of returning from the counted number of balls to the number of balls held corresponds to the concept of moving a ball from a so-called ball box to an upper plate.
When the counting ball use switch 814 is operated once, a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) of the counting ball moves to the number of holding balls. Thereby, the player can play again using the number of balls moved. The movement from the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls is displayed in the message / operation area unit 806 of the operation display device 7.

Further, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) includes a ball number display 3 as a first display device capable of displaying the number of balls held, and a counting ball display 813 as a second display device capable of simply displaying a counting ball. The card unit 600 is capable of displaying details of the number of balls held and counting balls, and is provided with an operation display device 7 as a third display device that is managed by the card unit 600. Display information of.
Here, the number of balls held is digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 3 under the control of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10), and the presence / absence of counting balls is simply displayed on the counting ball display 813. On the other hand, the number of balls and the details of the counting balls are displayed by the control on the card unit 600 side. Therefore, when notifying the player of the number of balls and counting balls, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) only displays the number of balls and counting balls simply by digital display and does not perform detailed display. Therefore, the control burden of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is reduced, and the efficiency is good.
Further, the player can grasp the number of balls possessed and the number of counted balls with the first to third devices, which is convenient and easy to understand.

G. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process is started based on the fact that the CPU 111A is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 481 of the power supply device 400 that supplies power to the game control device 100 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the power supply device 400 at a predetermined timing (a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 100 and the reset terminal of the CPU 111A is turned on, and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 111A is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released to start the CPU 111A. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the RAM 111C and the like of the game control device 100, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 481 while turning on the RAM clear switch 112 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 400. There is.

When the CPU 111A is activated, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 111A is initialized, and access to the RAM 111C is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps S401 to S404).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S404 is provided here just in case. .

After step S404, the other board activation wait timer is set in step S405. This is a state where a control device other than the game control device 100 (main board) (for example, the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, etc.) is activated and can reliably take in the command from the game control device 100. Since it takes a predetermined period to become, the delay time is set by the other board activation wait timer.
Next, the process proceeds to step S406, and a payout command reception interrupt is permitted. In this case, since a command may be transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, an interrupt for receiving the command is permitted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. The determination here is performed using, for example, a power failure detection signal (not shown in step S407, but the same determination as in steps S435 to S437 described below is performed). If it is determined in step S407 that no power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S408, and the other board activation wait timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Next, in step S409, it is determined whether or not the other substrate activation waiting timer has become "0". If not, the process returns to step S407 to repeat the loop. Then, the loop is repeated, and if the other board activation waiting timer becomes “0”, the determination result in step S409 becomes YES, and the process proceeds to step S410 and subsequent steps. Therefore, at this time, the process of sequentially starting each unit of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S439 shown in FIG. 34, and the processes after step S439 are performed. At this time, processing for power failure is sequentially performed (details will be described later).

If no power failure has occurred and the process proceeds from step S409 to step S410, it is first determined in step S410 whether or not there is a gaming machine ID transmission request. This is because there is a case where a command requesting transmission of the gaming machine ID is sent from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100, and it is determined whether or not there is the request command. If there is no gaming machine ID transmission request, it waits in this step S410, and if a gaming machine ID transmission request comes, it will progress to step S411 and will perform main control ID transmission processing. Thereby, the gaming machine ID of the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the payout control device 200.
Next, in step S412, it is determined whether frame opening information has been received. This is because the frame opening information detected when the front frame 12 is opened at night is taken into the dispensing control device 200 when the dispensing control device 200 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. After that, it is also sent to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100, but it is determined whether or not the game control device 100 has received the frame opening information from the payout control device 200. . If no frame opening information has been received, the process stands by in step S412, and if frame opening information has been received, the process proceeds to step S413 to determine whether a frame opening information transmission error command has been received. This is because the frame opening information detected when the front frame 12 is opened at night is taken into the dispensing control device 200 when the dispensing control device 200 reads the output signal from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64. After that, it is also transmitted to the card unit 600, but when the card unit 600 does not receive it within a certain time, a frame opening information transmission error command is produced from the payout control device 200 via the game control device 100. Since the error notification is sent to the control device 300, it is determined whether or not the game control device 100 has received a frame opening information transmission error command from the payout control device 200.

If the frame open information transmission error command is received in step S413, the process proceeds to step S414 to set the frame open information transmission error flag, and in step S415, the frame open information transmission error command is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). ). As a result, the effect control device 300 does not transmit the frame opening information to the card unit 600 and performs an effect of displaying on the display device 41 that an error has occurred.
After step S415, the process proceeds to step S416. On the other hand, if no frame opening information transmission error command has been received in step S413, the process jumps to step S416.
In step S416, it is determined whether a frame opening fraud occurrence error command has been received. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 100 has received the error information indicating that the front frame 12 has been illegally opened from the payout control device 200. There are two types of “commands related to frame opening information” (see main processing (FIGS. 36 to 38) of the payout control device 200) transmitted by the payout control device 200, and there is frame open information. This corresponds to the “frame open error occurrence error command”. If the frame open fraud occurrence error command is received in step S416, the process proceeds to step S417 to set the frame open fraud occurrence flag, and in step S418, the frame open fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). Send. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs an effect of displaying, on the display device 41, an error that the front frame 12 has been illegally opened based on the frame opening fraud occurrence command.
After step S418, the process proceeds to step S419. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S416 that a frame opening fraud occurrence error command has not been received, the process jumps to step S419.

In step S419, it is determined whether the power is turned on while pressing (operating) the RAM clear switch 112 of the power supply device 400. If the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 112 is being pressed, the process proceeds to step S420, and it is determined whether or not the frame open error state is being set. This is because when the RAM clear switch 112 is pressed, all the data such as the registers of the RAM 111C and the CPU 111A are cleared and initialized, and therefore it is determined whether or not there is a frame open error state before the initialization. It is. At this time, if the frame open error is in progress, the information of the frame open error is initialized (cleared) and disappears, so that it is not deleted.
That is, if it is determined in step S420 that the frame open error state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S421, where it is determined whether all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 111C are normal power failure inspection area check data. If so, the process proceeds to step S422 assuming that the power failure is restored (when the power failure is restored), and if abnormal (if not stored normally), the process branches to step S427. The power failure inspection area check data is set in step S440 described later. In this step S421, since it is determined whether or not the power failure has been restored based on the plurality of check data in this way, the determination of whether or not the power failure has been restored is made with high reliability.

In step S422, a checksum of data in the RAM 111C (RWM) is calculated. In step S423, the checksum is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 111C is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S427. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S424.
In step S424, a process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, in step S425, 426, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is transmitted to the payout control device 200 (payout control board) and the effect control device 300 (effect control board). After step S425 and 426, the process proceeds to step S431 shown in FIG.

The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that it was during a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be included in this power outage recovery command. The received effect control device 300 resumes the display on the display device 41 for notifying the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In addition, if there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 300 that has received this command at the time of power recovery recovers, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Thereby, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 111C and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.
Furthermore, if the command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) is in the frame open error state as described above, the error information is also included. For example, the display on the display device 41 that notifies that the frame open error state that was being executed at the time of the power failure is resumed as it is after the power failure is restored.

Next, when it is determined in step S420 that the frame open error state is not in effect, or when the process jumps from step S421 or S423 to step S427, the processes after step S427 including step S427 are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step S427 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100 is performed. That is, in step S427, all the RAM 111C areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 111C, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step S428, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step S429 and 430, the command at the time of RAM initialization (power-on command) is issued, the payout control device 200 (payout control board), and the effect control device. Processing to transmit to 300 (production control board) is performed. When the power-on command is transmitted, in response to the power-on command, the effect control device 300 performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position. As described above, since it is confirmed that the frame opening error state is not being established, the RAM 111C is initialized, so that the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost and security is high.

When the process proceeds to step S431 through steps S429 and 430, or when the process jumps from step S425 to step S431, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 111A, for example, is activated in step S431 shown in FIG. . CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step S432, activation setting of a random number generation circuit provided in a CPU peripheral circuit built in the CPU 111A is performed. This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of some of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S434 described later.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in step S432 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, in step S433, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. When the process proceeds to the next step S434, an initial value random number update process is performed in step S434. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the random number so that it is difficult to deliberately hit the game ball at the timing to fire.
Next, the process proceeds to step S435, where the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, 2 times) is set, and in the next step S436, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In step S437, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S434. During normal operation, steps S436 to S434 are repeated.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S437, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If negative, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred and the process returns to step S436.
Note that when the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the current process and forcibly execute the power failure processing from step S438. However, in the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S437. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S438, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, then all outputs are turned off in the next step S439 (off data is output to all output ports), and then a power failure occurs in step S440. Execute information setting processing. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.
After step S440, in the next step S441, a checksum of the data in the RAM 111C is calculated and saved in a predetermined checksum area. Then, in step S442, access to the RAM 111C is prohibited, and the process waits.
Note that the power failure process in steps S438 to S442 described above is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the CPU 111A due to a power failure (including a normal power shutdown).
Further, as described above, if it is determined in step S407 that a power failure has occurred, the process jumps to step S439, performs the above-described processing after step S439, and finally prohibits access to the RAM 111C in step S442, and then waits. Will do.

[Game control device timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S431 and S433 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S451, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step S452 is executed. In this input process, the detection signals of the aforementioned sensors (start port switches 36a and 37a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, count switch 38a, magnet sensor 61, radio wave sensor 62, vibration sensor 144, etc.) are read. Run. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
It should be noted that signals from various switches necessary for enclosing ball control such as the front frame opening switch 64, the glass frame opening switch 63 and the switches denoted by reference numerals 761 to 765 in FIG. 29 are input to the dispensing control device 200. This is not handled in the input process of the game control device 100.

Next, in step S453, an output process is executed in which the output data set in steps S460, S461, S462, S463, S464, etc., which will be described later, is set in the corresponding output port and output.
Next, in steps S454 and S455, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

Next, timer update processing is performed in step S456. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the game program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine, but if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step S457. This is a process for monitoring undetected errors of the above-described sensors and detection signals from the magnet sensor 61, the radio wave sensor 62, the vibration sensor 144, and the like. It should be noted that illegal winnings other than when the special winning opening 38d and the public power supply 37 are not open are monitored in the process of step S459 described later.

For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
・ Magnetic fraud ・ Vibration fraud ・ Radio wave fraud

Next, the process proceeds to step S458, and it is determined whether the account is being settled or resting. This is determined based on information from the payout control device 200.
If the payment is being made or during a break, the process jumps from step S459 to step S462 and proceeds to step S463. This is to jump to step S463 without executing steps S459 to S462 related to the progress of the game in order to prevent the enclosed ball game from being performed during settlement or rest.
If it is not in the process of paying out or taking a break, the process proceeds to step S459, and a winning opening switch monitoring process is executed. The winning port switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (start port switches 36a and 37a, winning port switch 35a, and count switch 38a in the special figure) set as described above, for example, the input flag of the count switch 38a is set. If so, processing such as addition of the number of balls of 15 prize balls (awarding) is executed. When the configuration of the payout busy signal of the first embodiment is applied, the processing shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 is performed as the winning opening switch monitoring processing. In this case, the payout control device 20 is added to the game control device 100.
The payout busy signal is input from 0.

Next, a payout command transmission process is performed in step S460. This is a process of transmitting a command from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200. When the configuration of the payout busy signal of the first embodiment is applied, the process shown in FIG. 9 is performed as the payout command transmission process.
Next, the process proceeds to step S461 to perform special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination (result form) of the special figure stop pattern, and the process of setting the change form of the special figure Is done.
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 300 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S462, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
After step S462, the process proceeds to step S463. The process proceeds to step S463, in addition to the case where the process proceeds through step S462, as described above, the determination result in step S458 may be YES. In step S463, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control device 100 to an external device such as the hall computer 186 or the card unit 600.
However, information necessary for the hall computer 186 and the ball management device 185 via the card unit 600 via the external information terminal board 71 and the first card unit connection terminal board 72A via the payout control device 200 from the game control device 100. Is output.

Next, an LED editing process is performed in step S464. This is a process for various LEDs (for example, various displays of the collective display device 50 and processing related to LED display. In this LED editing process, the special figure design determined in the special figure game process of step S461 is performed. Also included is a process for displaying the symbols of the usual figure determined in the usual figure game process in step S462 and other information on various indicators and LEDs constituting the collective display device 50.
Next, in step S465, a ball number command transmission process is performed. This transmits a command to the effect control device 300 and causes the effect control device 300 to control the decorative ball display device 270.
After step S465, to resume the main routine, the registers saved in step S466 are restored, all interrupts are permitted in step S467, and the process is interrupted (returned).
Note that “return = RETI” means returning to the process interrupted at the time of interrupt. On the other hand, “RET” represents a return from the subroutine to the original routine.

H. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[Main processing of payout control device]
First, the main process of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, the flowchart of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described using “step H” as a step number.
This main process starts based on the fact that the CPU 211A is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch 481 of the power supply device 400 that supplies power to the payout control device 200 is turned on, a reset signal is issued from the power supply device 400 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When input to the control device 200 and the reset terminal of the CPU 211A is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the CPU 211A is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released, and the CPU 211A is activated. Further, when the operator wants to initialize the RAM 211C and the like of the payout control device 200, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 481 while turning on the RAM clear switch 112 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 400. There is.

When the CPU 211A is activated, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, the CPU peripheral circuit (including the serial port) built in the CPU 211A is initialized, and access to the RAM 211C is permitted. An off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”) is output to all output ports (steps H1 to H4).
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step H4 is provided here just in case. .

  After step H4, it is determined in step H5 whether all values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 211C are normal power failure inspection area check data. If it exists, the process proceeds to Step H6, and if it is abnormal (if not stored normally), the process proceeds to Step H9. The power failure inspection area check data is set in steps H50 and H51 described later. In this step H5, since it is determined whether or not it is a power failure recovery time based on a plurality of check data in this way, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not it is a power failure recovery time.

Next, in step H6, a checksum of data in the RAM 211C (RWM) is calculated, and in step H7, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the data in the RAM 211C is corrupted), the process proceeds to step H9, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step H8.
In step H8, a process for power failure recovery (initial value setting) is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, the process proceeds to Step H11.
The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, information indicating that there was a break (for example, a break start command) is included in this power outage recovery command, and this command is restored via the game control device 100. The presentation control device 300 that has been received sometimes restarts the display on the display device 41 that informs the user of a break that has been executed during a power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. If there is a power outage during settlement, information indicating that the settlement is in progress is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery, and the effect control device 300 which received this command via the game control device 100 at the time of power failure recovery. For example, the display on the display device 41 for notifying the settlement being executed at the time of a power failure is resumed as it is after the power failure is restored. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 211C and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

On the other hand, if the value of one or both of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 is not normal power failure inspection area check data in step H5, or if the checksum does not match the checksum at the time of power interruption in step H7 (abnormal), step The process jumps to H9, and the processes after Step H9 are performed including Step H9.
When processing proceeds to step H9 and subsequent steps, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200 is performed. That is, in step H9, all the RAM 211C areas to be used are cleared. Specifically, in RAM 211C, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared, and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. Next, in step H10, processing for setting an initial value at the time of power-on is performed in an area to be initialized, and then the process proceeds to step H11.
In addition to the payout control information related to the payout control, the RAM 211C also stores individual identification information (payout unique ID (a unique ID of the payout control device)) of the payout control device 200. In the initialization process, the payout control is performed. Only the area storing the payout control information for is initialized. That is, the area storing the individual identification information of the payout control apparatus 200 is an access-prohibited area, and other areas, that is, areas storing payout control information related to payout control are cleared, and only necessary areas are initialized. I try to do it.
Thus, since the RAM 211C is initialized before the frame opening information is taken into the payout control device 200, the frame opening information is not lost when the power is shut off, and the security is high.

Next, when the process proceeds from Step H8 to Step H11 or when the process proceeds from Step H10 to Step H11, the processes after Step H11 including Step H11 are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step H11 and subsequent steps, first, the frame opening information is read in step H11 and stored as state comparison data. The frame opening information means that the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 (also referred to as a gaming frame opening detection switch) opens the front frame 12 (normally when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply to the gaming machine). This is information indicating whether or not is detected, that is, when the game hall is closed at night.
Note that the frame opening information from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64 is output to the dispensing control device 200 for a sufficiently long time. The frame opening information may be stored in the RAM 211C or a register of the CPU 211A.
Next, the number of frame open information checks is set in step H12. This is because the reliability may be lowered if the frame opening information is read only once. Therefore, the reliability of the frame opening information is obtained by executing the reading a plurality of times and comparing it with the state comparison data. It is what raises. The number of checks for the frame opening information is set to 2 times or 3 times, but it may be more than that.
Next, the frame opening information is read in step H13, and the read frame information is compared with the state comparison data in step H14. This is because the first frame information read first is saved as the state comparison data, so that the frame information read in step H13 is compared with the saved state comparison data, and there is an error in the frame information. This is for confirming whether there is (for example, the read frame information is not correct due to the influence of noise or the like).
If the read frame information is not equal to the state comparison data, the process returns to step H11 to repeat the loop. When the loop is repeated and it is determined that the read frame information is equal to the state comparison data, it is determined whether or not the process has passed from step H14 to step H15 and the same state has been continued for the number of times frame open information is checked. The number of checks here is the number set in step H12. If the decision result in the step H15 is NO, the process returns to the step H13 to repeat the loop, and if the same state is continued as many times as the number of frame release information checks, the decision result in the step H15 becomes YES and the frame release information is changed. Confirm and advance to step H16.
The frame opening information read in step H13 is repeatedly looped as described above until the frame is turned on (opened) or the frame is turned off (closed), so that the frame opening information is obtained accurately. I have to.

In step H16, the determined frame opening information is saved. In step H17, the main control board reception interrupt and the card unit reception interrupt are permitted. This permits an interrupt between the game control device 100 or the card unit 600 and the payout control device 200. Next, a gaming machine ID transmission request command is prepared in step H18.
The “gaming machine ID transmission request command” in Step H18 requests the gaming control apparatus 100 (main control board) to transmit the gaming machine ID of the gaming control apparatus 100 (main control board) to the payout control apparatus 200. It is a command to do.
Next, main control command setting processing is performed in step H19. This is processing when a command is transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 by serial communication. Thereby, the gaming machine ID transmission request command prepared in step H18 is transmitted to the gaming control apparatus 100.

  After step H19, it is then determined in step H20 whether a gaming machine ID has been received from the main control board (game control device 100). The loop is repeated until the gaming machine ID is received, and if the gaming machine ID is received, the process goes to step H21. In Step H21, it is determined whether or not there is a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 600. The loop is repeated until there is a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 600, and if there is a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 600, the process goes to step H22.

If the process proceeds to step H22, a gaming machine ID output process is performed in step H22. In this process, the game machine ID of the main control board (game control device 100) and the game machine ID of the payout control device 200 are output to the outside (card unit 600).
In step H23, a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the card unit 600. The command corresponding to the frame opening information is to determine the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 12 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. This is a command for notifying the unit 600 of an error, issuing a command to output error information to the hall computer 186 (and not to lend the ball), and determining frame opening information. When the front frame 12 is not opened, it is a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the effect that there is no problem even if lending a ball to the card unit 600.
Next, a transmission control timer is set in step H24. The transmission control timer counts the time until the notification of receipt of the frame opening information is received from the card unit 600, and the transmission control timer is set to a predetermined initial value. If the notification of receipt of the frame opening information is received from the card unit 600 within the time counted by the transmission control timer, it can be determined that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted to the card unit 600, and no notification of reception of the frame opening information is received. Then, it is determined as a transmission error (see step H28 and the like described later).

Next, in step H25, it is determined whether or not there is a frame release information reception notification from the card unit 600. If there is a frame opening information reception notification, it is determined that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted from the dispensing control device 200 to the card unit 600, and the process jumps to Step H30.
On the other hand, if there is no frame release information reception notification from the card unit 600 in step H25, the process proceeds to step H26, and the transmission control timer is updated by (-1). As a result, the transmission control timer counts down. Next, in step H27, it is determined whether or not the transmission control timer has timed up. If not, the process returns to step H25 to repeat the loop. If a frame release information reception notification is received from the card unit 600 during loop repetition, the determination in step H25 is YES and the process returns to step H30. On the other hand, when the transmission control timer expires in step H27, the process proceeds to step H28, the frame opening information transmission error flag is set, and the frame opening information transmission error command is sent to the main control board (game control device 100) in step H29. Send. Thereby, a frame opening information transmission error command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 transmits, for example, a command related to frame opening information to the card unit 600 based on the frame opening information transmission error command. It is also possible to notify the store clerk by performing control such as displaying an error message on the display device 41.

Next, the process proceeds to step H31, and a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 100). The command corresponding to the frame opening information is the frame opening information, and when there is evidence that the front frame 12 is opened (for example, the frame is opened at night), it is determined that there is a possibility of fraud. This is a command such as issuing a command for notifying an error on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300 via the control device 100. Also, the front frame 12 is opened by determining the frame opening information. If not, it means a command for determining that there is no possibility of fraud and issuing a command to the game control device 100 that there is no problem even if a game is played.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step H25 that there is a frame opening information reception notification from the card unit 600 and the process jumps to step H30, a frame opening information transmission normal command is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 100) in step H30. To do. Thereby, the game control device 100 recognizes that the frame opening information has been normally transmitted from the payout control device 200 to the card unit 600.
Next, the process proceeds to step H31, and a command related to the frame opening information is transmitted to the main control board (game control device 100). As a result, as described above, when there is a possibility of fraud from the determination of the frame opening information, an error notification can be made on the display device 41 through the control of the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100. .

After step H31, the process proceeds to step H32.
In step H32, a normal return command wait timer is set. The normal return command wait timer counts the time until the normal return command is received from the game control apparatus 100, and the normal return command wait timer is set to a predetermined initial value. The normal return command is a command that is transmitted when the game control device 100 is activated without initialization of the RAM, and is a power failure recovery command here (see step S425).
If the normal return command is received from the game control device 100 within the time counted by the normal return command waiting timer, it can be determined that the game control device 100 has started without initializing the RAM 111C, and if the normal return command is not received, It is determined that some abnormality has occurred.
In addition, during the period of waiting for reception of the normal return command, reception of a RAM initialization command (power-on command, see step S429) transmitted when the RAM 111C is initialized by the game control device 100 is also monitored.

  In step H33, it is determined whether a normal return command (power failure recovery command) has been received from the game control apparatus 100. If received, it is determined that the game control apparatus 100 has been started without initializing the RAM 111C, and step H42 Jump to. That is, the normal recovery command (power failure recovery command) makes a power failure recovery command notification indicating that the game information storage means (RAM 111C) has not been initialized and the storage means (RAM 211C) is not initialized. In this case, data backed up without initializing the RAM 211C is used.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step H33 that a normal return command (power failure recovery command) has not been received from the game control device 100, whether a RAM initialization command (power-on command) has been received from the game control device 100 in step H34. Determine.
When the RAM initialization command is received, the process jumps to step H37, and a process of initializing the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200 is performed. That is, the RAM initialization command (power-on command) initializes the game information storage means (RAM 111C), and accordingly, issues an initialization command notification for instructing the initialization of the storage means (RAM 211C).
If the RAM initialization command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H35 to update the normal return command wait timer by (-1). As a result, the normal return command wait timer counts down. Next, in step H36, it is determined whether or not the normal return command waiting timer has timed up. If the time has not expired, the process returns to step H33 to repeat the loop.

When the normal return command waiting timer expires in step H36, the process jumps to step H37 to perform processing for initializing the RAM 211C of the payout control device 200.
As described above, when neither the initialization command notification (normal return command) nor the power failure recovery command notification (RAM initialization command) is received during the predetermined period after the power-on of the gaming machine, Since the initialization process of the RAM 211C is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the RAM 211C of the payout control apparatus 200 is not initialized even though at least the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100 is initialized. Consistency can be maintained.
Further, in the abnormal state where the communication between the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is cut off, even if there is awarded ball data backed up in the payout control device 200, it is discarded. It is possible to prevent payout in an abnormal state.

The gaming machine performs payout control based on a payout command from the game control means (main control means), and initializes the storage means of the payout control means when the RAM initialization switch is operated when the power is turned on. ing. In addition, when a power-off state occurs for some reason, data is backed up in the storage means of the payout control means, and the payout control state based on the data immediately before the power supply is cut off is maintained.
However, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), since the initialization signal is detected by each of the game control means and the payout control means, the game control means is initialized. In spite of this, there is a problem that a situation may occur in which the payout control means is not initialized.
In other words, there is a problem that consistency in the initialization of the memory means of the game control means and the payout control means cannot be maintained, and such a problem is solved by adopting the configuration as described above in the gaming machine of this embodiment. doing.

As described above, game information storage means that performs game control in an integrated manner, transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to a predetermined prize area, and stores information related to game control in the event of a power failure A game control means (game control device 100) having (RAM 111C) and a memory capable of performing game ball payout control based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means and storing information related to payout control during power failure Payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) having means (RAM211C),
The game control means
In response to the power-on of the gaming machine being configured to transmit a power-on notification to the payout control means,
As a power-on notification,
Initializing the game information storage means, and accordingly, an initialization command notification (normal return command) for instructing initialization of the storage means,
Either the game information storage means is not initialized, and either one of the power failure recovery command notification (RAM initialization command) instructing not to initialize the storage means is transmitted,
Withdrawal control means
When the initialization command notification is received, the storage means is initialized,
When receiving a power failure recovery command notification, it is configured not to perform initialization processing of the storage means,
If neither the initialization command notification nor the power failure recovery command notification is received between the time when the gaming machine is turned on and the predetermined period elapses, the storage means is initialized. .

When the normal return command waiting timer expires in step H36, a return error flag may be set and a return error command may be transmitted to the main control board (game control device 100). As a result, the return error command is sent to the game control device 10.
The effect control device 300 can notify the store clerk by performing control such as displaying an error message on the display device 41 based on the return error command. Also good.

If it is determined in step H34 or H44 that a RAM initialization command (power-on command) has been received, or if it is determined in step H36 that the normal return command wait timer has expired, steps H37 to H41 are performed. Initialization processing of the RAM 211C is performed.
In the initialization process of the RAM 211C, first, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited in step H37, the CTC is stopped in step H38, and the off signal (“0” of the binary signal is output to all output ports in step H39. Is output). In step H40, the RAM other than the predetermined area is cleared. In step H41, an initial value is set in an area that requires an initial value. In step H42, the CTC is activated.

In addition to the payout control information related to the payout control, the RAM 211C also stores individual identification information (payout unique ID (a unique ID of the payout control device)) of the payout control device 200. In the initialization process, the payout control is performed. Only the area storing the payout control information for is initialized. That is, the predetermined area in step H40 is an area in which individual identification information of the payout control apparatus 200 is stored, and other areas, that is, areas in which payout control information related to payout control is stored are cleared, and necessary areas Only to be initialized.
In addition, since the RAM 211C is initialized after the processing based on the frame opening information is completed, the frame opening information at the time of power-off is not lost, and the security is high.

From the above, the storage means (RAM 211C) stores the payout control information relating to the payout control and the individual identification information of the payout control means,
The payout control means (payout control device 200)
In the initialization process of the storage means, the payout control information related to the payout control is initialized without initializing the individual identification information of the payout control means stored in the storage means.

On the other hand, when the step H33 normal return command (power failure recovery command) is received, the process proceeds to step H42, and for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) provided in the CPU 211A is activated. CTC is a circuit for timer interrupt.
Next, in step H43, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are permitted. In step H44, it is determined whether or not a RAM initialization command is received from the game control device 100. If received, the process proceeds to step H37. The RAM 211C is initialized.
Since the RAM 211C initialization process in steps H37 to H41 is also performed, the RAM initialization command reception information is also initialized. After this initialization process is performed, a new RAM initialization command is received. Until this is done, it is determined in step H44 that a RAM initialization command has not been received.
If it is determined in step H44 that the RAM initialization command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H45, where the number of power failure monitoring signal checks (for example, 2 times) is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is received in the next step H46. It is determined whether or not the power is on. If the power is on, the process proceeds to step H47 for final determination of power failure. If the power is not on, the process returns to step H45. Steps H44 to H46 are repeated during normal operation. That is, steps H44 to H46 are main loop processing.

Then, when proceeding to Step H47, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks, and if this determination result is affirmative, a final determination is made that a power failure has occurred, and the procedure proceeds to Step H48. If it is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step H46.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step H48. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and instantaneously due to noise, etc., even though no power failure has actually occurred, since the power failure monitoring signal is checked multiple times in step H47. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step H48, all interrupts (that is, all interrupts) are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step H49 (off data is output to all output ports), and then steps H50 and H51 are performed. Execute power failure information setting process. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step H50, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step H51.
Next, in step H52, a checksum of the data in the RAM 211C is calculated, the checksum calculated in step H53 is saved in a predetermined checksum area, and then access to the RAM 211C is prohibited in step H54, and then waiting.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps H48-H54 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU211A by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption | blocking is included).

[Timer interrupt processing of the payout controller]
Next, the timer interruption process of the payout control apparatus 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps H42 and H43 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step H71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary, and then the input process in step H72 is executed. In this input process, each of the aforementioned sensors (launch ball detection switch 761, foul ball detection switch 762, out ball detection switch 763, first sealed ball detection switch 764, second sealed ball detection switch 765, glass frame opening switch 63). The detection signal is read from the front frame opening switch (night monitoring switch) 64).
Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.
Here, the front frame opening switch 64 detects the opening of the front frame 12 at night (when main power is not supplied to the gaming machine), but even in a normal state (when main power is supplied to the gaming machine). The opening of the front frame 12 is detected.

Next, in step H73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in steps H84, H85, H86 and the like described later to the corresponding output port is executed.
Next, card unit connection confirmation processing is performed in step H74. The card unit connection confirmation process is to confirm whether the card unit 600 is turned on, whether communication between the card unit 600 and the pachinko machine 10 can be normally performed, or the like.
For example, whether the voltage of the input (VL input) connected to the power line of the card unit 600 via the first card unit connection terminal plate 72A is on (that is, whether the voltage is higher than the specified value). If the determination result is that the voltage of the VL input is on, for example, the card unit connection indicating that the card unit 600 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 200 Processing such as setting a confirmation flag is performed.
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, data communication with the card unit 600 is particularly important as compared with the conventional gaming machine, and therefore, it is regularly checked whether the card unit 600 is correctly connected. Further, it is one of the conditions for permitting game ball launch to be correctly connected to the card unit 600.

Next, timer update processing is performed in step H75. Thereby, the update of various timers handled by the processing in the payout control program is performed in an integrated manner. For example, the initial value setting, value determination, and processing based on the determination result are performed by another routine, but if the initial value is set, the update may be performed by the timer update processing. Moreover, the timer used for each determination mentioned later may be updated as mentioned above, for example, may be updated by a corresponding routine.
Next, switch monitoring processing is performed in step H76. This is because the input flags (input flags such as the launch ball detection switch 761, the foul ball detection switch 762, the out ball detection switch 763, etc.) set as described above are monitored, and the number of balls held due to the launch is reduced. Processing for controlling the enclosed sphere, such as increasing or decreasing the number of spheres, is performed.

Next, an error monitoring process is executed in step H77. This is a process for monitoring an undetected error of each sensor described above, an open state of the glass frame 15, and the like.
For example, the types of errors monitored in this error monitoring process are as follows.
・ Glass frame open (glass frame 15 open)
・ Front frame open (front frame 12 open)
・ Switch abnormality (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
-Board ball number error-Enclosed ball number error

The enclosing ball number error includes the following.
(A) Enclosed ball number shortage error (b) Enclosed ball number excessive error (c) Enclosed path error error There are other errors in the card unit unconnected error, which are the card unit in step H74 described above. Monitored by the connection confirmation process.

Next, the process proceeds to step H78, and a firing permission signal editing process is performed. This is when the firing permission signal ON data is set when the firing is possible and the card unit 600 is not connected (for example, when a card unit connection confirmation flag (step H74) described later is not set). Is used to set firing permission signal off data (cannot be fired). This includes, for example, a forced firing process in which a ball remaining at the launching tip (the launching rod is operated by the launching solenoid 773) at the time of a power outage is shot empty when the power is turned on.
Next, in step H79, the number of possessed balls is added. This is a process of receiving a prize ball command from the game control device 100 and adding it to the number of balls held.
Next, in step H80, it is determined whether or not all card unit communication line confirmations in step H74 are OK. This is because the board (first card unit connection terminal board 72A) for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 10 side (payout control device 200 side) and the card unit 600 side is connected, and the confirmation result of the communication line is OK. The process branches depending on whether or not there is. If the card unit communication line confirmation is OK, step H81, step H82, step H83, and step H84 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step H85. If not OK, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
Steps H81 to H84 are processes for substantially starting and advancing the game, as will be described later. Therefore, if the determination in step H80 is negative, the game is not started and does not proceed. means. That is, in this example, if the communication line between the payout control device 200 and the card unit 600 is not normally connected, the game is not substantially advanced. As a result, it becomes difficult to illegally acquire the number of balls by an unauthorized input to the payout control apparatus 200 using the communication line, and the effect of improving security can be obtained.

If all card unit communication line confirmations are OK in step H80, the ball feed control process is performed in step H81. This includes setting the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 772 when the conditions for sending the ball to the launch position are complete, and performing processing to send the ball to the launch position, as well as powering the ball remaining at the launch pad during a power failure A process of turning off the ball feed solenoid 772 in order to cope with the empty shot at the time of charging is also included.
Next, in step H82, a settlement / rest control process is performed. This monitors the behavior of the break switch 812, the payment instruction from the card unit 600, and the like, and performs processing related to payment and break. Next, card unit reception analysis processing is performed in step H83. This is to analyze the signal received from the card unit 600 by the payout control device 200.

Next, the process proceeds to step H84, where a periodic command transmission process is performed. As described above, the payout control device 200 sends various game information from the game control device 100 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various information including the number of balls held and the number of counted balls) to the card unit 600 at predetermined intervals. (For example, 400 ms), and various information (various information including the number of balls held and the number of counted balls) from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 ms). Therefore, transmission at predetermined intervals is executed by a periodic command transmission process.
After step H84, the process proceeds to step H85. Further, as described above, when the determination result of step H80 is NO, the process jumps to step H85 without executing steps H81 to H84.
When the process proceeds to step H85 in this way, external information editing processing is executed in step H85. This edits data to be output from the payout control device 200 to an external device such as the hall computer 186 and the card unit 600.
However, the information from the game control device 100 is transferred to the hall computer 186 and the ball management device 185 via the card unit 600 via the external information terminal board 71 and the first card unit connection terminal board 72A via the payout control device 200. Necessary information is output.

Next, LED editing processing is performed in step H86. This performs processing related to display of various LEDs (for example, an error display LED 250, a ball count indicator 3, an LED built in the counting switch LED 811, an LED built in the break switch 812, etc.).
Next, a polishing apparatus control process is performed in step H87. This is to send an instruction to the polishing control device 159 via the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 to control the operation of the polishing device 156 for encapsulated spheres.
After step H87, to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step H88, the saved register is restored in step H89, all interrupts are permitted in step H90, and Return to the interrupted process.
When the configuration of the payout busy signal of the first embodiment is applied, the payout busy signal editing process shown in FIG. 21 is performed in the timer interrupt process in the payout control apparatus 200.

FIG. 40 shows an overview of information communicated with processing in the main control board (game control apparatus 100), the payout control board (payout control apparatus 200), and the card unit 600 when the power is turned on. In addition, about the process of the game control apparatus 100 and the payout control apparatus 200, the code | symbol of the corresponding process of FIGS. 33-38 was attached | subjected.
First, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, processing at the time of turning on the power is started in each device.
The payout control apparatus 200 performs processing for initializing the RAM 211C with reference to the power failure inspection area and the checksum, or processing for recovering from a power failure without initializing the RAM 211C (steps H5 to H10).
Then, the frame opening information is acquired (steps H11 to H16), and a transmission request for the gaming machine ID is output to the gaming control device 100 (steps H18 to H20).
The game control device 100 transmits the gaming machine ID to the payout control device 200 based on the ID transmission request from the payout control device 200 (steps S410 to S411).
When the payout control device 200 receives the gaming machine ID from the gaming control device 100, it waits for a gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 600.

The card unit 600 performs initial setting when the power is turned on (step C101), and outputs a transmission request for the gaming machine ID to the payout control device 200 (step C102).
The payout control device 200 transmits the gaming machine ID based on the gaming machine ID transmission request from the card unit 600 (steps H21 to H22), and further transmits the frame opening information to the card unit 600 (step H23).
Based on the reception of the frame opening information, the card unit 600 transmits a frame opening information reception notification to the payout control device 200 (step C103), and the payout control device 200 transmits the frame opening information transmission result (frame opening information transmission normal command or A frame opening information transmission error command) is transmitted to the game control device 100 (steps H25 to H30). The game control device 100 transmits the frame opening information transmission result to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (steps S413 to S415).
Also, the payout control device 200 transmits the frame opening information to the game control device 100 (step H31), and the game control device 100 transmits the frame opening information to the effect control device 300 (steps S416 to 418).

Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 performs processing for initializing the RAM 111C with reference to the power failure inspection area and the checksum, or processing for recovering from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C (steps S419 to S430).
In addition, a RAM initialization command or a normal return command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 according to whether or not the RAM 111C is initialized at this time (steps S425 and S429).
When the payout control device 200 receives the RAM initialization command, the payout control device 200 performs processing for initializing its own RAM 211C (steps H33 to H41).
Even if the RAM initialization command or the normal return command is not received within a predetermined period, the process of initializing its own RAM 211C is performed (steps H33 to H41).

  The gaming machine 10 as described above performs overall game control, and also includes a winning area provided in the gaming area 32 (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, first special variable winning prize device). 38, based on a game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, A payout control means (payout control device 200) for paying out game balls, and the game control means indicates whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. A state that indicates that a payout control can be started from the payout control means when a power failure occurs and recovery from the power failure is performed based on a signal (busy signal) based on a signal (busy signal). Signal Even if it has been done, it does not immediately send a prize ball command to the payout control means, but corresponds to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means for a predetermined period of time. Thus, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Therefore, accurate payout control can be realized without providing a payout control means with a backup function. In other words, the game control means performs control for transmitting a prize ball command based on the status signal output from the payout control means, so that the prize ball command is transmitted only when the payout control means can immediately execute the payout control. Will be. As a result, data corresponding to winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held on the game control means side, so when a power outage occurs, it will be backed up by the game control means and will be backed up to the payout control means Accurate payout control can be realized even without a function.

  Also, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control means. First, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output over a predetermined period. Since the player can surely recognize that the prize ball command can be received, the prize ball command is transmitted, so that the prize ball command can be prevented from being missed.

  Also, the payout control means (the payout control apparatus 200) is a game control means during a period when the game control means (the game control apparatus 100) outputs a state signal indicating that the payout control means cannot start payout control. Even when a prize ball command is received from the player, payout control corresponding to the received prize ball command is performed.

  Therefore, even if the prize ball command is transmitted by mistake for some reason, the corresponding payout control is performed without losing the prize ball command, so there is no disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. ing.

  Accordingly, the status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a wasteful process of checking each prize ball command counter when the prize ball command cannot be transmitted, and to reduce the control burden.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The configurations of the above-described embodiments can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machines 32 gaming area 35 general prize opening (winning area)
36 Start prize opening (winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (winning area)
38 First Special Variable Prize Winning Device (Winning Area)
39 2nd Special Variable Prize Winning Device (Winning Area)
100 Game control device (game control means, prize ball command counter)
200 payout control device (payout control means)

Claims (3)

Game control means for performing overall game control and transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to a prize area provided in the game area;
Payout control means for performing payout control of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means includes
Based on a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, control to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means,
When a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control means even if the status signal indicating that payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Do not send,
The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means being continuously output over a predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by that. The payout control means includes
Even when the prize ball command is received from the game control means during a period in which the game control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control means cannot start payout control. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein payout control corresponding to a prize ball command is performed. A plurality of winning areas with different numbers of prize balls are provided in the gaming area,
The game control means includes
For each prize ball number, a prize ball command counter that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted,
The status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means,
The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein

Images